You are on page 1of 121

4G HSPA+ LTE EPC LTE-ADVANCED TD-LTE VoLTE CLOUD COMPUTING M2M UCC IP CONVERGENCE IPv6 MPLS IMS

2013 CATALOG

TECHNOLOGY TRAINING
1st EDITION

Why Award?
Integrity
-


We are a trusted vendor for more than


235 corporate clients, including the leading
manufacturers and service providers in the
wireless industry

Expertise
- We have delivered more than 215,000
student days and more than 1.7 million
training hours since 1997
- We have hands-on experience from design
to deployment
- Our staff collectively holds more than 80
patents in communications technologies

Flexibility
- We save you time with customized content
and training solutions to meet project specific needs

About this Catalog


This course catalog contains an overview of our company and services, course descriptions for both
Instructor Led and eLearning delivery methods.
Let us help you and your team become an expert in advanced wireless and IP technologies. Simply go
straight to a curriculum, or browse through the catalog to view the comprehensive training solutions and
services offered by Award Solutions.
We provide cutting-edge training courses with the highest quality. The course descriptions in this catalog
are subject to change and new course descriptions are added to curriculums throughout the year. Please
visit Awards website at www.awardsolutions.com or contact us at +1-972-664-0727 ext. 306 for the
latest information.

- We can schedule training when and where


you need it, with a global footprint of
delivering training in more than 25 countries
- Our delivery methods give you cost-effective
options, whether the preference is on-site,
virtual, or self-paced eLearning

Excellent Return on Investment


- We help teams ramp up on new technologies
quickly and efficiently

Table of Contents
Why Award?....................................................... i

Emerging Trends............................................ 41

Company Overview...................................................... 1
Instructor Led Training................................................ 2
Self-paced eLearning.................................................. 3
Course Index............................................................117

Overview of OFDM (e)...............................................42


Multiple Antenna Techniques (e).............................43
Wi-Fi Overview (e)......................................................44
* Wi-Fi Technical Overview..........................................45

Technology for Business................................. 5

IP Convergence & IMS.................................. 47

* Enterprise IP Network Connectivity............................ 6


* Compare and Contrast Cellular Technologies........... 7
* The World of Enterprise.............................................. 8

Cloud Computing Essentials for Business................. 9


The M2M Ecosystem................................................ 10
Unified Communications (UC) and IMS for the Enterprise...11
IP Convergence for Sales and Marketing................12
LTE Services for Enterprise Customers....................13
Technology Trends for Business............................... 14
* The World of App Development................................15
* The Mobile Enterprise............................................... 16
* Topics of Interest....................................................... 17

4G LTE............................................................. 19

Welcome to LTE (e)....................................................20


LTE Overview (e)........................................................ 21
LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (e).....22
LTE Air Interface Signaling Overview (e)..................23
VoLTE Overview (e).................................................... 24
* Overview of IPv6 for LTE Networks (e).....................25
The Road to LTE.........................................................26
LTE Essentials........................................................... 27
LTE Technology Overview..........................................28
Exploring IPv6 for LTE Networks...............................29
VoLTE and IMS in LTE-EPC Networks.......................30
Mastering LTE Air Interface...................................... 31
LTE Protocols and Signaling.....................................32
Mastering TD-LTE Air Interface.................................33
LTE and GSM/UMTS Interworking............................34
LTE-EPC Networks and Signaling.............................35
LTE-Advanced Technical Overview...........................36
LTE RF Planning and Design Certification Workshop... 37
LTE RAN Signaling and Operations Certification.....38
* LTE-EPC Capacity Planning Certification Workshop....39
* LTE RAN Capacity Planning Certification Workshop...40

Welcome to IP Networking (e)..................................48


IP Convergence Overview (e)....................................49
Overview of MPLS (e)................................................50
Overview of IMS (e)................................................... 51
Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview (e)............52
IP Quality of Service (QoS) (e)..................................53
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) (e)..........................54
Ethernet Backhaul Overview (e)...............................55
IP Basics (e)...............................................................56
IP Routing (e)............................................................. 57
QoS in IP Networks (e)..............................................58
TCP and Transport Layer Protocols (e).....................59
Ethernet Basics (e)....................................................60
Ethernet VLANs (e).................................................... 61
Ethernet Bridging (e).................................................62
Interconnecting IP Networks (e)...............................63
Welcome to IPv6 (e)..................................................64
IP Convergence Essentials.......................................65
Ethernet Backhaul Essentials..................................66
Exploring IPv6............................................................67
Exploring MPLS.........................................................68
Exploring IMS (R8)....................................................69
* Exploring SIP, VoIP and IP Convergence with IMS...70
Exploring Ethernet Backhaul....................................71
Voice and Video over IP Protocols and Technologies...72
Exploring IP Routing and Ethernet Bridging............73
Ethernet Backhaul Planning..................................... 74
* SIP and Diameter for IMS/VoLTE.............................75
* Exploring Cloud Computing Service Models........... 76
* Exploring Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS)............ 77
* Exploring the Service Oriented Architecture (SOA).78

UMTS/HSPA+................................................. 79
Welcome to UMTS (e)...............................................80
Overview of UMTS (e)................................................ 81
UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (e)........82
UMTS Signaling (e)....................................................83
UMTS Mobility (e)......................................................84
HSDPA (R5) (e)..........................................................85
HSUPA (R6) (e)..........................................................86
HSPA+ Overview (R7) (e).......................................... 87
Exploring UMTS (WCDMA)........................................88
Exploring HSPA+ (R7, R8 & R9)...............................89
Multi-Carrier HSPA+ (R8 & R9).................................90
Mastering UMTS Core Networks (R99 to R7).......... 91
Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling.....92
Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling................93
HSPA+ Protocols and Signaling (R7, R8 & R9).......94
IMS in UMTS (R8) Networks.....................................95
3GPP Packet Core Networks (R99 to R8)................96
UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+ Air Interface............................ 97
UMTS/HSPA (WCDMA) RF Design Mentoring..........98
UMTS (WCDMA) RF Optimization Mentoring...........99
UMTS/HSPA+ RF Optimization Workshop.............101

Wireless Landscape....................................103

Welcome to Wireless Networks (e)........................104


Welcome to GSM/GPRS (e)....................................105
1xEV-DO Networks (Rev 0) (e)................................106
1xEV-DO Networks (Rev A) (e)................................107
Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (e)...................108
Overview of WiMAX (e)............................................109
Exploring Wireless Landscape, IP Convergence, and 4G...110
Exploring Wireless Technologies and Networks....111
Fundamentals of RF Engineering...........................112
Exploring GSM/EGPRS/UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+........113
GSM Performance Workshop.................................114
1x and 1xEV-DO Fundamentals.............................115
Wireless and 3G/4G Basics...................................116

* New Course

(e) eLearning Course

Company Overview
Award Solutions, Inc. has more than 15 years

Content

Flexibility

of training excellence in advanced wireless and IP


technologies. Our products and services provide
our clients with innovative, flexible, and costeffective solutions that help rapidly boost workforce
productivity and competence to more quickly meet
market demands.

Our focus has always been on developing content


thats valuable to the students and presented in a
way that is easy to understand. We present the big
picture and pull the details together to explain how
they relate.

We offer flexibility in our course content and


scheduling, and multiple delivery options. Every
course from Award Solutions is tailored during the
course delivery to meet the specific needs of the
audience.

The level of technical depth in our training


programs gives students unique benefits that they
can apply immediately. We offer a range of courses
appropriate for audiences needing a high-level
overview, as well as engineers looking for technical
details.

Analogies
We use various techniques to simplify complex
technologies. Analogies in our courses are
abundant and easy to comprehend, relating
concepts to real-life scenarios.

Expertise

Our Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) and consultants


are best-in-class, having achieved substantial
industry experience in areas such as product
definition and development, network deployment,
and network and systems engineering. We strive
to help our students and customers become an
expert.
Award Solutions constantly keeps a finger on the
pulse of the industry, always researching new
technologies, and updating our curriculums to stay
on the cutting edge.
Whether you are a training manager responsible for
a large organization, or a team lead responsible for
enhancing your teams skills, Award Solutions can
meet your technology training needs.

Training Facts
98% of those taking Award classes
would recommend them to others
235+ corporate clients including leading
operators and manufacturers worldwide
More than 49,000 student training days
delivered on LTE since 2007
More than 215,000 student days and
1.7 million training hours delivered since
1997

Our courses are designed, developed and delivered


by our own industry experts who have a wealth of
relevant experience and a passion for teaching.
Not only do our Subject Matter Experts (SMEs)
understand the technology, they know how to teach,
emphasize the key points, repeat whats important,
and bring in analogies and examples as needed.
They are focused on knowledge transfer and dont
teach just by the book, instead adapting to the
students needs. They bring invaluable knowledge
into the classroom because they can relate the
theory to real-world experiences.

Engaging
We leverage the latest technology to create
engaging, interactive courses regardless of the
delivery format. Keeping participants engaged is
paramount.

Average course evaluation is 4.5 out of 5


Our Subject Matter Experts have an
average of 21 years of experience in the
wireless industry

2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

Our Promise
To continually demonstrate our core values: Integrity,
Expertise, Flexibility, Teamwork and Excellent Return
on Investment.

Instructor Led Training


Award Solutions offers programs designed for
business roles as well as technical roles. Our
Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) blend accurate,
relevant content with insightful analogies and a
touch of humor, providing students with a rich
learning experience. We also tailor the content
during class to the specific background and
experience of the students.
Our technical courses span introductory to
advanced brimming with technical details. The
level of technical depth in our advanced technology
training courses is unique to the marketplace.
Award Solutions is known for teaching beyond
the facts. We bring you the big picture view, and
explain the hows and the whys, along with the
factual details. Our goal is to provide students with
a good understanding of the technology, answer
questions, and equip participants to apply their
newly acquired knowledge, ultimately increasing
productivity.
Our Technology for Business curriculum caters to
executives, business and sales roles. It is designed
to help individuals understand the direction of the
industry and impact of new technologies.
We offer highly customized training and consulting
solutions. We can integrate topics from multiple
courses to deliver only the information important
to you and your team. We can also integrate our

training programs with your specific tools and/or


product-specific information.
In an effort to help organizations determine the
effectiveness of our training programs, we offer
Skills Assessment. The results offer a tangible
measurement of the knowledge growth and overall
course effectiveness. The final report includes the
pre-course score and post-course score along with
the % improvement for each participant.
All students that participate in our Instructor
Led courses receive illustrated course books.
Course books include the presentation slides and
comprehensive text explaining the key points. In
addition, Award Solutions provides students with
an eBook and classroom notes.

On-site Training
Our Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) travel
to your facility to engage the students in an
interactive learning experience.

Virtual Training
Award Solutions embraces different
learning styles and preferences. Our
Virtual Training programs are conducted by our
Subject Matter Experts in real-time. Students
login to the course from the comfort of their
home or office and engage in an expert-Led
interactive learning experience. For teams that are
geographically dispersed, clients save on travel
and living expenses and maximize productivity and
learning.
Award Solutions
virtual training
environment adds
a new dimension
of learning. Our
Subject Matter
Experts encourage questions and promote
discussions. The sessions are highly interactive
and very effective.

Public Training Events


Students can
receive answers
to their questions
during class or
in one-on-one
sessions during
breaks. Our Subject Matter Experts are also
accessible via e-mail after the course completes.

2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

Award Solutions hosts a subset of our


courses in our office and in conjunction
with Industry events. This expert-led sessions
are ideal for individuals and small groups. Visit
our website at www.awardsolutions.com or
lteuniversity.com for the latest schedule.

Self-paced eLearning
Award Solutions flexibility in delivery methods let

At the end of each course, 10 review questions

Delivery Methods

you choose a format and style appropriate to your

enable students to assess their understanding. The

All eLearning courses are available via our website

needs.

summary report allows students to quickly review

at www.awardsolutions.com.

the content that needs further study.


Our self-paced eLearning is designed to target a

For large organizations, we offer volume discounts

wide range of students. Our overview courses are

Benefits

ideal foundation builders for design engineers,

Award Solutions eLearning courses are rich

compliant and may be easily integrated with a

as well as executives and managers interested in

in technical content. Courses are designed

Learning Management Systems (LMS). The LMS

an end-to-end view of the network architecture.

specifically for the self-paced multimedia learning

keeps track of the students progress, and the

For those who desire a greater level of detail on

environment.

results of the course assessment.

and site licenses. Our courses are SCORM

specific portions of the network, we offer more

Duration

advanced courses.

Our eLearning courses have varying durations,

eLearning Courses

ranging from 1 to 4 hours. All courses are divided

Designed to accommodate a wide

into topics that can be completed in 15 minutes

variety of learning styles, our eLearning

or less. Students may take the training in shorter

courses take full advantage of the multimedia

segments or in longer blocks to digest all the

environment. Each course provides students with

information covered at their own pace.

full audio, narrated text and colorful animations


to enhance the learning experience. Review

eLearning demos are available on our website at

questions in a variety of formats test the students

www.awardsolutions.com.

understanding for each topic. Many courses also


offer an opportunity to dig deeper into topics. In
addition, every eLearning course allows students
to navigate through the courses according to their

Welcome to IPv6 eLearning Course

own interests and needs, rather than in a strictly


linear fashion.

2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1. 972.664.0727

2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

Technology for Business


In the telecommunications industry today, it takes less time to tell someone what is not changing, rather than what is. Wireless networks and devices
are continually increasing in speed and capability, and Machine-to-Machine connections are growing exponentially. On the wireline side, cloud
computing is significantly impacting the IT paradigm, there continues a large-scale convergence toward data and IP networks, and enterprises and
organizations are looking for ways to use the technology to work and collaborate more effectively.
The Technology for Business curriculum includes courses covering IP Convergence, Machine-to-Machine (M2M), Unified Communications, Cloud
Computing, and LTE. In addition we would be happy to work with you to understand your training objectives and customize a solution that meets your
needs.

About the Curriculum

The Award Solutions Technology for Business curriculum is designed for


executives and sales/marketing teams to understand the direction of the
industry and impact of key technologies. It equips salespeople to sell
technology-based solutions by helping them understand their customers
problem domain, explain technology-based solution components, and
explore creative solutions.

Instructor Led Courses

*Enterprise IP Network Connectivity *NEW


*Compare and Contrast Cellular Technologies *NEW
*The World of Enterprise *NEW
Cloud Computing Essentials for Business
The M2M Ecosystem
Unified Communications (UC) and IMS for the Enterprise
IP Convergence for Sales and Marketing
LTE Services for Enterprise
Technology Trends for Business
*The World of App Development *NEW
*The Mobile Enterprise *NEW
*Topics of Interest *NEW
IP Convergence for Sales and Marketing

2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

Enterprise IP Network Connectivity


Instructor Led (Virtual) | Duration: 1 Hour

For those working with enterprise IT departments, it helps to be able to speak the language of IP connectivity. IP is to data transfer as a dial tone is to a
wireline telephone. Data-related conversations with those in enterprise IT departments can sound like they are in a foreign language. This session introduces
a number of concepts that might likely arise in such conversations, with a focus on understanding different options for how enterprises might achieve IP
communication between different sites. It discusses how the options differ and provides examples of when different options make sense. The session gives
special focus to the popular Layer 3 IP-VPN scenario.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended for anyone seeking a basic overview of Enterprise


IP network connectivity.

1. Enterprise Networks: A Big Picture

Learning Objectives

2. Example of a Simple Site

After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Sketch a layered view of a large enterprise network


Sketch how IP networks are interconnected within a large company
State the role of MPLS in interconnecting networks
List enterprise options for connectivity
Compare and contrast L1, l2 and L3 VPN connectivity solutions
Describe the role of MPLS
Show end-to-end route propagation and traffic flow with layer 3
VPNs

1.1. Layered view


1.2. Site connectivity
2.1. Architecture, components and
terminology
2.1.1. Layers (IP, Ethernet, physical,
Wi-Fi)
2.1.2. Routers and switches
2.1.3. VLAN, subnet, domains

4. End-to-End IP Interconnectivity
Scenario
4.1. Routing: How routers learn about
their world
4.2. Forwarding: How packets travel
from source to destination

5. Summary

3. Interconnection with VPN solutions


3.1. Public vs. private VPNs
3.1.1. VPN through Internet
connection
3.1.2. VPN through private
connection
3.2. Types of private VPN services (Layers
1-3 )
Explore the benefits/limitations,
applicability, and an example of the
following:
3.2.1. Layer 1 VPN
3.2.2. Layer 2 VPN
3.2.2.1. Point-to-point
3.2.2.2. Any-to-any (VPLS)
3.2.3. Layer 3 or IP VPN
3.3. Role of MPLS

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.0

Compare and Contrast Cellular Technologies


Instructor Led (Virtual) | Duration: 2 Hours

The world of cellular technologies can be daunting: it is a world that blends cutting-edge newer technologies with legacy technologies that have been deployed
for years. These technologies share some characteristics and have distinct differences, and every technology comes with a new set of acronyms to confuse
those trying to make sense of it all! In addition, some technologies support optional features that may or may not be deployed; features which can significantly
impact data speeds and performance. This variety of characteristics and options, combined with the confusing marketing messages proclaimed to the public,
underscores the importance for technical sales teams to be clear on (and be able to clarify for the customer) the true similarities and differences between the
technologies. This session explores UMTS/HSPA+ and LTE and provides a conceptual comparison of the key benefits and limitations of each.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended for those in technical sales roles.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List the evolution of the technologies in the GSM family


(GSM/GPRS, UMTS, HSPA, HSPA+, LTE) and the CDMA family
(CDMA2000 1x, 1xEV-DO)
Describe the value added by each new step in the technology
evolution
Sketch how different technologies within the same family operate
simultaneously
Compare voice capacities and quality across technologies
Compare theoretical and practical data speeds across
technologies
Describe how simultaneous voice and data connections are
achieved through different technologies
Describe interoperability between one technology and another
Summarize the key benefits and limitations of UMTS/HSPA+ and
LTE
Discuss the importance of network engineering to cellular
performance
Discuss the role of frequency spectrum in cellular performance.

1. Cellular Generations
2. A Tale of Two Families
3. Technology Paths
3.1. GSM, UMTS, HSPA/HSPA+, LTE
3.2. CDMA2000 1x, 1xEV-DO (Rev. A)

4. North American Operators


4.1. Verizon, AT&T, T-Mobile, Sprint/Clear

5. 4G Clarified
6. Wireless Data Performance
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.
6.6.

Frequency channels and bandwidth


Frequency spectrum
Shared bandwidth
Quality of Service (QoS)
Advanced antenna techniques
Network engineering

2013
2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

7. Technology Comparison For


UMTS/HSPA+ and LTE (Compare
the Following)
7.1. Frequency channels (includes TDLTE)
7.2. Data rates: Theoretical vs.
practical
7.3. Architecture
7.4. Interoperability and global
roaming
7.5. QoS
7.6. Simultaneous voice and data
(includes VoLTE)

8. LTE-Advanced
9. Summary

v1.0

The World of the Enterprise


Instructor Led (Virtual) | Duration: 4 Hours

The sales role within operators is changing from a single-point-of-contact, widget-based approach to a much more consultative approach, working with
different roles within a company to propose a relevant, customer-specific solution. This can be a difficult transition for those accustomed to the traditional
approach. It mean making new contacts within different organizations (inside and outside of telecom/IT), and perhaps at different levels. The consultative
sell also means understanding more about the customers business, to be able to propose relevant solutions. The World of the Enterprise is designed to help
those in such roles become familiar with the world of larger businesses, providing a big picture of the enterprise organization and processes that will help
them make this transition.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course is intended for anyone seeking a basic overview of how large
businesses are organized and approach communications-related projects.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
List and describe several technology trends impacting businesses
List key C-level roles that might be present within a company and
describe their function
Describe how an IT department is organized to provide information
services to the enterprise
Explain a typical process by which IT implements new solutions
Define common business acronyms such as ERP and BI
Illustrate the felt needs of a typical IT organization

1. Enterprise Organization
1.1. Trends changing business
1.2. Typical organization
1.3. Lines of Business (LOBs)

2. C-Level Roles and Responsibilities


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.

CEO
COO
CFO
CTO
CIO
CMO

3. The IT Organization
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.
3.8.

3D view of IT
IT overview
IT Org structure
Application development
Infrastructure
Operations
Shared services
Exercise

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

4. IT Operations
4.1. IT Project Lifecycle
4.2. IT Operational Model
4.2.1. Plan
4.2.1.1. Enterprise
Resource
Planning (ERP)
4.2.1.2. Business Process
Management
(BPM)
4.2.1.3. Business
Intelligence (BI)
4.2.1.4. Mobile Device
Management
4.2.2. Build
4.2.3. Run
4.3. IT Processes
4.4. Managing the Business
4.4.1. Key Performance Indicators
4.4.2. Considerations

5. Summary

v1.0

Cloud Computing Essentials for Business


Instructor Led | Duration: 1/2 Day

Cloud computing is gathering momentum as a solution that can save consumers and enterprises time and money. There are a variety of cloud-based
approaches, including Infrastructure-as-a-Service (IaaS), Software-as-a-Service (SaaS), and Platform-as-a-Service (PaaS), and these alternatives, combined
with an industry eager to advertise their cloud-based solutions, can cause cloudiness in the minds of enterprises, service providers and consumers trying to
determine how the cloud can help them. This training solution introduces cloud computing in general, and then focuses on the three predominant
implementations of cloud computing. It combines both a view of the technology and the business considerations to create a comprehensive understanding of
cloud computing. Where appropriate, real examples of Cloud solutions are discussed.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended for those who desire to understand Cloud


Computing in more depth, from both a business and technical perspective.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Explain the value proposition behind cloud computing


Discuss the merits and downsides of cloud computing for the
consumer and the enterprise
Describe the business and technical considerations for the three
predominant flavors of cloud computing: IaaS, SaaS, and PaaS
Differentiate between public, private, virtual private and hybrid cloud
models
List and explain different flavors of IaaS
Explain the importance of SLAs in cloud computing solutions
Discuss the future of cloud computing, both in the consumer and
enterprise arenas

1. Cloud Computing
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.

Cloud Computing defined


Cloud Computing components
Industry trends
SaaS, IaaS, and PaaS
Cloud categories
1.5.1. Public
1.5.2. Private
1.5.3. Hybrid
1.6. Motivations
1.7. Pros and cons

2. Infrastructure as a Service
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

2.6.
2.7.
2.8.
2.9.

Types of IaaS
Virtualization
Deployment
Administration
Resource allocation options
2.5.1. Administrative
2.5.2. Programmatic
Security
Configuration options
Pricing options
Industry examples

2013
2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

3. Platform as a Service
3.1. Development benefits of PaaS
3.2. Platform options
3.3. Industry examples

4. Software as a Service
4.1. Requirements for SaaS
applications
4.2. SaaS challenges
4.3. Service Level Agreements (SLAs)
4.4. Synchronization
4.5. Security
4.6. Office apps: Microsoft and Google

5. The Cloud and Mobility


5.1. Benefits and challenges
5.2. Cloud and M2M
5.3. Example

6. Cloud Computing: The Future


6.1. Standards
6.2. Consumer space
6.3. Enterprise space

v1.0

The M2M Ecosystem

Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: TBS_102


The area of mobile Machine-to-Machine (M2M) communications is exploding. Wireless service providers regularly report their connections in addition to their
subscribers. Devices such as eBook readers continue to demonstrate the power of wireless connectivity to the consumer psyche, and vertical markets are
seeing the potential of M2M like never before. In addition, 4G networks promise support for new types of M2M devices and applications. This course helps
participants understand the different elements of the ecosystem required to make M2M solutions successful, from devices to service providers to applications
and systems integrators. Several concrete examples are developed throughout the course. Upon request, the session can include an exercise that guides
participants in considering how one of their customers might benefit from M2M solutions.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended for those in sales-related roles with a need to


understand the M2M ecosystem in greater detail.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Describe M2M in a sentence


Sketch the entities involved in an M2M solution
Describe the current state of the M2M industry
List several examples of embedded devices and the problems they
solve
List key players in the device, service provider, and M2M
management spaces
Give examples of M2M across several vertical markets
Describe how a business could benefit from M2M solutions

1. M2M Overview
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.

M2M defined
M2M ecosystem
Mobile vs. wired M2M
Implications and challenges
Applications
Selling M2M

4. Exercise for Sales (Optional): M2M


at your Customer
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

Customer need(s)
Possible solutions
Questions to answer
Next steps

2. M2M Devices
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
2.7.
2.8.

Device considerations
Traffic requirements
Device configurations
Device management
Security
Wireless technologies and M2M
Key players
Device examples

3. M2M Connectivity and Management


3.1. M2M connectivity
3.2. M2M business models
3.3. Traditional providers
3.3.1. AT&T
3.3.2. Verizon
3.3.3. Sprint
3.4. Non-traditional service providers
3.5. M2M management platforms
3.6. Security in M2M

10

2013
2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

v1.2

Unified Communications (UC) and IMS for the Enterprise


Instructor Led | Duration: 1/2 Day | Course Number: TBS_103

As communications networks converge upon the Internet Protocol (IP), devices continue to expand their capabilities, wireless networks are becoming faster
and more sophisticated, and newer services such as instant messaging and collaboration are augmenting (and replacing) traditional services such as voice
and email communications. The world of Unified Communications and Collaboration (UCC or UC&C) seeks to bind some of these elements together to create
a communications ecosystem that is more convenient, simpler to operate, and easier to manage. Businesses are formulating and executing their UCC
strategies and seeing results. At the same time, the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) platform is gaining momentum as a standardized framework for providing
IP-based services. This learning solution explores the world of UCC, covering a variety of UCC concepts and approaches, and introduces IMS and how IMS
might work together with wireless and wireline technologies to provide UCC solutions for businesses.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended for account managers involved with Enterprise


Sales.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Clearly define Unified Communications and Collaborations (UCC)


List several services that typically fall under the UCC umbrella and
describe their operation at a high level
Sketch a general UCC architecture, and describe the function of the
UCC Engine, Mobility Servers, and Presence
List several providers of UCC solutions and name and briefly
describe their UCC solutions
Describe the vision of Mobile UCC and the components required to
make it a reality
Explain how existing UCC solutions can be extended through mobility
Clearly define the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS)
Sketch a high-level IMS architecture and describe the roles of the
Application Servers, Session Controllers, and service enablers
Clearly define Quality of Service (QoS), why it is important, and how it
is supported in IMS
Describe how IMS is well-suited for implementing some UCC
solutions
Compare an IMS-based UCC approach to a non-IMS based approach

1. UCC Defined
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.

Perspectives on UCC
UCC defined
UCC and the Enterprise
UCC trends
Why now?

2. UCC Services
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
2.7.
2.8.

4. UCC and IMS


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

IMS defined
Quality of Service (QoS)
VoLTE and RCS
IMS and UCC

5. Moving Forward

Voice
Messaging/unified messaging
Conferencing
Instant messaging/chat
Presence/location
Collaboration
UC-enabled business processes
Example: Contact center

3. UCC Components
3.1. UCC options
3.2. UCC components
3.2.1. IP-PBX/UCC manager
3.2.2. Application servers
3.2.3. IP phones
3.2.4. UCC clients
3.3. Mobile UC

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.0

11

IP Convergence for Sales and Marketing


Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: TBS_104

IP Convergence is bringing together technologies and companies, and enterprise account managers are finding the need to be conversant in this space.
Technologies such as Ethernet, VoIP, Unified Communications, and IMS are building blocks for providing Quad Play and advanced B2B communication
services. This course explains fundamental concepts behind these building block technologies to enhance the knowledge and confidence of enterprise
salespeople in the IP Convergence domain. It provides the background necessary to understand the value proposition behind the collaborative deployment
of these technologies, allowing the participants to discuss solutions with greater confidence, relevance and accuracy. The course includes several exercises
and can incorporate an optional in-class assessment to assist with retention.

Intended Audience

This course has been designed for those involved with B2B sales and
marketing.

Learning Objectives

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


Highlight the goals and industry direction towards 4G and IP
convergence for Quad Play and multimedia services
Explain interdependence and collaboration between VoIP, MPLS/VPLS,
Metro/Carrier Ethernet, 3G/4G and IMS
Sketch the architecture of an IP-Converged network and list its benefits
Sketch an MPLS architecture and list its services
Describe key MPLS concepts: Pseudowire, L2 and L3 VPN services and
VPLS
List the motivation, benefits and challenges associated with VoIP
Sketch the VoIP architecture
Explain hosted VoIP and legacy Centrex services operations
List and elaborate on key characteristics of SIP
List the motivation, benefits and challenges associated with IMS
Describe IMS building blocks (presence, location, authentication etc.)
Explain IMS service portability and mobility independent of access
Discuss alternatives to IMS and the competitive landscape
Sketch a basic enterprise network architecture
Show how authentication and security are provided in an IP converged
network
Sketch the LTE network architecture at a high level
List key capabilities and possible applications of LTE
Understand and use typical data-related acronyms correctly in
communication

Suggested Prerequisites

Course Outline

1. Setting the Stage

1.1. IP Convergence: What is it?


1.2. IP Convergence technologies
1.2.1. IP/MPLS
1.2.2. Carrier Ethernet
1.2.3. 3G/4G wireless
1.2.4. DSL/Cable/Fiber
1.2.5. VoIP/IMS

2. IP Networking Fundamentals

2.1. Internet architecture


2.2. IP networking protocol layers
2.3. IP routing and forwarding

3. IP/MPLS

3.1. Capabilities and benefits


3.2. Network architecture and key
concepts
3.3. Conceptual operations in
IP/MPLS
3.4. MPLS applications
3.4.1. L2 and L3 VPNs
3.4.2. VPWS and Pseudowire
3.5. IPv6 benefits and challenges

4. Metro/Carrier Ethernet

4.1. Motivation and benefits


4.2. Network architecture and key
concepts
4.3. Applications and network
operations

5.3.
5.4.
5.5.
5.6.

6. IMS

More flexibility through SIP and SDP


Interworking with legacy networks
Video over IP
Software services

6.1. IMS defined


6.2. Capabilities and benefits
6.3. Network architecture and key
concepts
6.4. IMS session setup
6.5. Inter-network mobility in IMS
6.6. Interworking with PSTN and Web

7. Introduction to IP Network Security

7.1. Big Picture of IP security landscape


7.2. Challenges in IP security
7.3. IP network security architecture and
techniques
7.3.1. Layered security architecture
7.3.2. Authentication and anonymity
7.3.3. Traffic encryption and privacy

8. 4G LTE

8.1. Network architecture and key


concepts
8.2. Capabilities and key applications
8.3. Mobility

9. Assessment Test

5. Voice and Video Over IP

5.1. Network architecture and key


concepts
5.2. VoIP call: Flexibility and security

Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)

12

2013
2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

v1.1

LTE Services for Enterprise Customers


Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day

LTE promises much faster data speeds and access to services that were not practical in 3G. As enterprise customers explore the capabilities and implications
of this technology, those involved with enterprise sales need to be prepared to confidently and accurately answer their questions. This session provides the
background necessary to answer more involved questions about the LTE technology and how it applies to enterprise customers, including questions about
devices and SIM cards, LTE sessions, connecting to enterprise networks, Quality of Service, Voice Over IP, and interoperability with other technologies,
including EV-DO and UMTS/HSPA+.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended for those in sales-related roles with a need to


dialog with customers about LTE.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the concept of a PDN in LTE and how it relates to enterprise
data access
Describe Quality of Service (QoS) in general, and how it is supported
in IMS and LTE
Sketch a high-level view of a packet data session in LTE
Explain the difference between Idle and Connected states, and the
impact to applications
Explain the value provided by IMS
Explain at a high level the process of transitioning between LTE and
EV-DO or UMTS/HSPA+
Describe how voice services can be provided over LTE and IMS
through VoLTE as well as traditional circuit-switched voice
List the benefits of providing VoIP services through IMS vs. OverThe-Top

1. LTE Service Architecture


1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.

4G landscape
LTE network architecture
Packet Data Networks (PDNs)
Access Point Names (APNs)
LTE devices
1.5.1. Device categories
1.5.2. SIM cards
1.6. Quality of Service (QoS)

2. LTE Sessions
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

Attach
LTE security
LTE bearers
QoS requirements
LTE performance and radio
conditions
2.6. Idle vs. connected states

3. Accessing Data Networks


3.1. Internet access
3.1.1. Internet access architecture
3.1.2. IPv4 and IPv6
3.1.3. IP address management
3.2. Enterprise access
3.2.1. Private IP access from LTE
3.2.2. Alternate connectivity options

2013
2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

4. Interworking with 1xEV-DO


4.1. Review: EV-DO mobility
4.2. Interworking architecture
4.3. Walkthroughs
4.3.1. LTE to EV-DO
4.3.2. EV-DO to LTE

5. Interworking with GPRS/HSPA+


5.1. Review: UMTS/HSPA+ mobility
5.2. Interworking architecture
5.3. Walkthroughs
5.3.1. LTE to UMTS/HSPA+
5.3.2. UMTS/HSPA+ to LTE

6. Voice Options for LTE


6.1. Circuit-switched voice
6.2. 3rd-Party VoIP
6.2.1. Over-The-Top (OTT)
services
6.2.2. OTT and QoS
6.3. IMS and VoLTE
6.3.1. IMS overview
6.3.1.1. IMS alternatives
6.3.1.2. IMS and QoS
6.3.1.3. High-level IMS
operation
6.3.2. VoLTE: What is it?
6.4. Simultaneous voice and data

v1.0

13

Technology Trends for Business


Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days

Businesses are leveraging emerging technologies to transform their marketing, sales, products, operations and infrastructure to gain competitive advantage.
Mobile networks and devices are continually increasing in speed, capability and ubiquity, and Machine-to-Machine connections are growing exponentially.
Cloud computing is significantly impacting the computing paradigm, there continues a large-scale convergence toward data and IP networks, and
organizational entities are coming together to provide converged value. In the midst of this change, it is difficult to stay informed on the state of our industry.
This session is a survey of all of these areas, providing an update on each and seeking to integrate them into a cohesive vision of the industry. The session
includes in-class exercises and interaction to reinforce the ways in which these elements work together to add value to the customer.

Intended Audience

This course is intended for a variety of audiences (Sales, Marketing,


Executives, Product Management, etc.) in service providers, enterprises,
and government agencies seeking to leverage these trends and their
underlying technologies.

Learning Objectives

After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Articulate major technology trends impacting enterprises and the


telecommunications industry over the next few years
Discuss some of the key transformations in technologies that
business use voice, collaboration, video, infrastructure etc.
Explain the BYOD/BYOC trends and associated Mobile Device
Management solutions
Describe the key improvements made by 4G LTE mobile networks
and how to truly compare networks
List and describe core concepts that are at the heart of these
technologies including MPLS, VPNs, Video, VoIP, QoS, and
Ethernet
Define M2M, sketch the M2M ecosystem and describe the
components
Describe cloud computing in a sentence and articulate its value
and challenges to the enterprise
List key elements of Unified Communications solutions and
describe deployment options

Special Note
This course is particularly powerful when combined with information on your business and how
it is addressing these trends. We would be happy to work with you to make the content
specific to your company.
14

Course Outline

1. Tomorrow in Perspective
1.1. Market trends
1.2. Technology trends

2. Components of Transformation
2.1. Collaboration
2.1.1. Voice and Video
2.2. Infrastructure
2.3. Automation
2.4. Mobility to all

3. Automation thru M2M


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.

M2M defined
The M2M ecosystem
M2M applications and devices
M2M service providers
Implications and challenges
The competitive landscape

4. Cloud Computing
4.1. Cloud fundamentals
4.1.1. Cloud Computing review
4.1.2. SaaS, PaaS, and IaaS
4.1.3. Cloud models
4.1.4. Implications of the cloud
4.1.5. The Cloud and security
4.2. Cloud services
4.2.1. Cloud Computing
4.2.2. Managed hosting
4.2.3. Co-location
4.3. The competitive landscape

2013
2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

5. The Voice Transformation


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.

IP telephony
VoIP, SIP, and IMS
Enterprise considerations
Unified Communications
The competitive landscape

6. Business Connectivity Solutions


6.1. Connectivity fundamentals
6.1.1. VPNs/MPLS/IPv6
6.1.2. Ethernet/optical
6.2. Connecting enterprises
6.2.1. Private WAN
6.2.2. Point-to-point services
6.2.3. Mobile wireless
6.3. The competitive landscape

7. Mobility Solutions
7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
7.5.

3G/4G networks
4G services for enterprise
Enterprise WiFi
Mobile device management
The competitive landscape

8. Putting It All Together

v1.0

The World of App Development


Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day

There was a time when the term app was familiar only to developers buried deep within technology organizations. Today, 10-year-old children discuss apps
and purchase and download them from app stores. As apps (and their associated revenue) establish a prominent place in our culture and business models,
there is an increasing likelihood that those in the communications industry will be interacting with or near the app development space. As such, they need to
be able to speak the language of the app world with accuracy and confidence. The World of App Development provides a foundational understanding of the
app world and terms and concepts likely to arise in discussions related to apps and app development. The session includes a high-level demonstration of app
development for the Apple iOS or Android development environment.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended for those in sales-related roles with a need to


understand and be conversant in the world of mobile application
development.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Discuss the current state and near-term trends of the mobile app
world
Provide a concise working description of common concepts in the
app development world
Compare several types of wireless connectivity for mobile apps
List several languages commonly used for app development, and
high-level characteristics of each
Explain the difference between SDKs and APIs and how they
facilitate app development
Describe the end-to-end app development process
Compare and contrast, at a high level, four mobile operating
systems
Describe the common business models in the app world, both for
development and sale of apps and app add-ons
Compare and contrast, at a high level, four app stores
Describe the differences between app development for general
mobile devices and M2M devices

1. App Development Foundations


1.1. The Business of Apps
1.1.1. Market snapshot
1.1.2. Success factors
1.1.3. The app revenue trail
1.1.4. Trends
1.2. Components of mobile applications
1.2.1. Apps and devices
1.2.1.1. Target devices
1.2.1.2. Hardware elements
1.2.1.3. Software elements
(Operating System,
Firmware, Apps)
1.2.2. Connectivity
1.2.2.1. Cellular (2G/3G/4G)
1.2.2.2. WiFi
1.2.2.3. Bluetooth
1.2.2.4. NFC
1.2.2.5. Zigbee
1.2.3. Web access and content
1.2.3.1. Browsers
1.2.3.2. Video and interactive
content (HTML5,
Flash)
1.2.4. App characteristics
1.2.4.1. Thick vs. thin clients
1.2.4.2. Server applications
1.2.4.3. Data stores
1.2.5. Sample app and interactions

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

2. The Development Process

2.1. SDKs and APIs


2.2. Development languages and
environments
2.3. Development frameworks
2.4. Data storage and access
2.5. Server applications and web
services
2.6. App development process
2.7. Timelines
2.8. Challenges

3. Mobile OS Platforms

3.1. The mobile OS landscape


3.1.1. Android
3.1.2. Apple iOS
3.1.3. BlackBerry OS
3.1.4. Windows 7
3.2. SDK platforms
3.3. Apps and M2M

4. Development Example
4.1. High-level video or live
walkthrough of app process for
iOS or Android

5. Market Channels
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

Apple App Store


Android Marketplace
Microsoft Marketplace
Blackberry App World

v1.0

15

The Mobile Enterprise


Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day

Technology and specifically mobile technology has fundamentally changed how business gets done. The Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) wave has demanded
companies to respond. Strategies must include Mobile Device Management (MDM), Security, Unified Communications (UC) and cloud. 4G LTE has opened up
new ways to leverage the mobile network. Many small to medium business are readily leveraging these technologies and gaining competitive advantages while
others are struggling to utilize them effectively. The session provides a description of these technologies, how they inter-relate and how companies of all sizes
can take advantage of these technologies. We will demystify the terms, the technology behind the terms and provide examples on how you can successfully
transition your company and experience the productivity gains and cost benefits.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended for people involved in helping their company


leverage these technology shifts. People in IT, sales, marketing, support,
operations etc. can learn what options exists and how they can benefit
from each.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) phenomenon and its
impact on businesses
Articulate the need for a Mobile Device Management (MDM)
solution and compare some of the different options that exist
List some of the potential security threats and possible solutions
Explain the cloud beyond the buzz and how it can actually benefit a
company of any size
Compare and contrast some of the cloud solutions
Articulate Unified Communications (UC) and the productivity impact
it can have on your company
Describe some of the possible UC products to consider
List some of the challenges that exist in becoming a mobile
enterprise and some of the potential ways to overcome them
Explain some of the core technologies that enable these mobile
enterprise solutions and their impact to the enterprise

16

1. Enterprise Technology Trends


1.1. The Bring Your Own Device (BYOD)
trend
1.2. Mobility advances
1.3. Consumer trends
1.4. Benefits and challenges

2. Wireless Options
2.1. 3G options
2.2. 4G options (HSPA+, LTE)
2.3. Wi-Fi access

3. Security
3.1. Where are the gaps?
3.2. Types of solutions
3.2.1. Authentication
3.2.2. Encryption
3.2.3. Remote wipe
3.2.4. Dual-persona
3.3. Other considerations

4. Mobile Device Management (MDM)


4.1. Problem scope
4.2. MDM solution features
4.2.1. Application management
4.2.2. Security
4.2.3. Policy control
4.2.4. Inventory management
4.2.5. Service management
4.3. Market solutions
4.3.1. Survey of existing solutions
4.3.2. Comparison of these solutions

2013
2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

5. Unified Communications
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.
5.6.

Productivity gains
Challenges
Traditional solutions
On-premise
Off-premise
Innovations and new solutions

6. Cloud
6.1. How can it really help your
business
6.2. Types of services
6.3. Deployment models
6.4. Impact to other solutions

7. Case Study
7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
7.5.

Strategy
Planning
Piloting
Implementation
Improving

8. Review

v1.0

Technology for Business


Topics of Interest
Big Data and Business Intelligence

Data Security goes Mobile

Companies realize that there is gold buried in the hills of data


they are able to gather; the challenge is slicing the data in
ways that provide relevant insights and actionable value. The
technology changing our world is also changing this game rapidly.
In addition to traditional sources like sales and financials,
companies now have access to real-time information from
sensors and machine-to-machine applications as well as a myriad
of information about their customers: what they do, what they
like, where they go, and with whom they associate. This session
provides an interesting introduction to the world of big data and
analytics, including examples of companies that have successfully
brought together data from diverse sources to better serve their
customers, generate additional revenue, and create differentiated
value.

As consumers are increasingly storing personal information


online, using the Internet for financial transactions, and using
their smartphones for payments, data security is becoming
increasingly important for the consumer. In early 2012, Symantec
organized a project where they purposefully lost Smartphones
and monitored them to see what type of information was
accessed. They found that 72% peeked at private pictures, 45%
checked out salary information, 47% accessed Cloud-based
documents and 64% looked at social networking information.
How can a business ensure that their information, stored upon
and accessible from their employees smartphones, is not
vulnerable? This session explores the importance of securing
mobile devices and information, both corporate and personal.

Technology and Consumer Privacy

Email is quickly being replaced with new social networking


tools as the preferred communications tool in business. Will
Facebook, Yammer, LinkedIn, Skype and Twitter, to name a few,
prove to be the productivity tools of choice in the coming years
for business? Microsoft, with their purchase of Yammer, said they
look forward to enhancing the social capabilities in Microsofts
communication and collaboration offerings. This session will go
beyond using these as marketing tools and explore their use as
communications and collaboration tools to increase productivity
in the workplace.

The same technology trends that provide convenience and


efficiency are also being leveraged for advertising and service
monetization. This session provides an introduction to the world
of consumer privacy and highlights key areas where consumer
information is being gathered through technology and used to
benefit business. It highlights the areas where the chief threats
to consumer privacy are occurring, and explores how companies
might monetize the information they obtain about consumers.

Social Networking as a Business Productivity Tool

2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

17

Technology for Business


Topics of Interest
Mobile Payments

Wireless Landscape

According to a survey by the Pew Internet and American Life


Project and Elon Universitys School of Communications, released
April, 2012, more than two-thirds of technology insiders believe
that paying with smartphones will overtake cash and credit card
payments by 2020. This market is evolving very quickly, with
players like Google, ISIS (Verizon, AT&T & T-Mobile), Apple, Paypal,
Square, Microsoft and Merchant Customer Exchange (MCX). This
session will explore the key technologies being used, key benefits
of mobile payments, and the advantages of mobile services over
frequent shopper cards or printed coupons.

Wireless technologies continue to transform the way we live


and work. This session provides an update on the cellular
industry, exploring the status and trends of wireless operators,
technologies and services. Topics include LTE (FDD and TD-LTE),
LTE Advanced, HSPA+, VoLTE, RCS and RCSe, and an update
on the device ecosystem. For those who need a regular update,
these topics are updated periodically and new topics are added
as necessary.

Hetnets, Small cells and WiFi: Offloading the Cellular


Network
Most of the major US operators have deployed, are deploying, or
are planning to deploy more small cells or leverage WiFi to help
offload their congested cellular networks. This session explores
these technologies and the benefits and drawbacks of one
approach compared to another. It also covers the interoperability
between these technologies and what it takes to provide a truly
heterogeneous network.

18

Media in Motion: The Approaching Wave of Video


In 2011, Cisco forecast that by 2015 90% of the internet traffic
will be video, and that about 2/3 of the worlds mobile data traffic
will be video by the year 2016. This session explores the nature
of video traffic, video on demand, the multiscreen phenomenon,
and the challenges of delivering so much traffic over our wireline
and wireless networks.

2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

4G LTE
LTE or Long Term Evolution enables rich multimedia content to mobile devices. The LTE technology includes a new air interface and simplified network
architecture. It offers significantly higher data rates for users while reducing the cost-per-bit for service providers. The network architecture is based on
distributed unified IP network that improves both throughput and latency. LTE is a key component of the evolution path for both UMTS/HSPA+ networks
and 1x/1xEV-DO networks.

About the Curriculum

Award Solutions LTE curriculum offers a suite of courses appropriate for


all audiences - from executives requiring a quick overview to designers and
developers seeking the details of the messages and parameters and also
the rationale behind the current standards. It is also appropriate for wireless
service providers seeking to understand the capability of the LTE network
and ability to design and deploy LTE networks for optimized performance.
The curriculum has been designed to address the needs of audiences with a
GSM/UMTS background as well as a 1x/1xEV-DO background.

Self-paced eLearning Courses

Welcome to LTE
LTE Overview
LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview
LTE Air Interface Signaling Overview
VoLTE Overview
*Overview of IPv6 for LTE Networks *COMING SOON

Instructor Led Courses

The Road to LTE


LTE Essentials
LTE Technology Overview
Exploring IPv6 for LTE Networks
VoLTE and IMS in LTE-EPC Networks
Mastering LTE Air Interface
LTE Protocols and Signaling
Mastering TD-LTE Air Interface
LTE and GSM/UMTS Interworking
LTE-EPC Networks and Signaling
LTE-Advanced Technical Overview
LTE RF Planning and Design Certification Workshop

LTE Essentials Instructor Led Course

Instructor Led Courses (continued)

LTE RAN Signaling and Operations Certification


*LTE-EPC Capacity Planning Certification Workshop *NEW
*LTE RAN Capacity Planning Certification Workshop *NEW

2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

19

Welcome to LTE

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: LTE_109


Long Term Evolution (LTE) is one of the choices for next generation broadband wireless networks and is defined by the 3GPP standards as an evolution to a
variety of 3G wireless networks, including both UMTS and 1xEV-DO; its high data rates enable a wide range of advanced multimedia applications. This
eLearning course offers a quick, high-level overview of LTE radio and Evolved Packet Core (EPC) networks. The key characteristics of the LTE air interface,
access network and core network are defined, along with a review of the capabilities of the LTE user equipment (UE). The services expected to be supported
on LTE networks are summarized, with special emphasis on voice solutions. Finally, important considerations for deploying LTE networks are laid out, including
the ability to interwork with existing 3G networks.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is an end-to-end overview of LTE networks, and is targeted for
a broad audience. This includes those in sales, marketing, deployment,
operations, and support groups.

1. Motivations for 4G

Learning Objectives

2. LTE Network Architecture

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


Identify the motivations and goals for 4G networks
Summarize the basic concepts of LTE Air Interface
Sketch the high-level architectures of the evolved LTE Radio
network (E-UTRAN) and Evolved Packet Core (EPC)
Describe the different categories of LTE UE
Walk through a typical LTE call from power-up to service setup to
disconnect
Define the key services expected on LTE networks
Illustrate the interworking solutions for GSM/UMTS and 1x/1xEV-DO
networks
Explain the important factors to consider when deploying LTE
networks

1.1. 3G limitations
1.2. LTE goals and targets
1.3. 4G building blocks
2.1. LTE architecture goals
2.2. LTE network components
2.2.1. Evolved UTRAN (E-UTRAN)
2.2.2. Evolved Packet Core (EPC)

3. LTE Devices
3.1. Device categories
3.2. Role of SIM card

4. LTE Air Interface


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

Scalable bandwidth
Supported radio bands
OFDM/OFDMA concepts
Multiple antennas in LTE

5. LTE Services
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.

Typical call setup sequence


Basic and enhanced services
Voice and SMS solutions
IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS)
Policy and Charging Control (PCC)

6. LTE Deployment
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

20

Interworking with GSM/UMTS


Interworking with 1x/1xEV-DO
Deployment considerations
Backhaul options

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v2.0

LTE Overview

eLearning | Average Duration: 3 Hours | Course Number: LTE_102


Long Term Evolution (LTE) is one of the choices for next generation broadband wireless networks and is defined by the 3GPP standards as an evolution to a
variety of 3G wireless networks such as UMTS and 1xEV-DO. Its high data rates enable advanced multimedia applications. This eLearning course offers a
quick and concise overview of LTE networks and the OFDM-based air interface. The LTE network architecture, network interfaces and protocols, air interface
and mobility aspects are covered to provide an end-to-end view of the network. A high-level glimpse into the life of an LTE User Equipment (UE) is provided by
walking through various stages from power-up all the way to setting up an IP address and exchanging traffic. By the conclusion of this course, the student will
understand what LTE offers, its network architecture, how it works, and potential applications and services.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is an end-to-end overview of LTE networks, and is targeted for


a broad audience. This includes those in design, test, sales, marketing,
system engineering and deployment groups.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the state of wireless networks and trends for next
generation wireless networks
Sketch the System Architecture Evolution (SAE) for LTE and its
interfaces
Describe OFDM concepts and how it is used in LTE
Define the key features of the LTE air interface
Walk through the mobile device operations from power-up to service
setup
Explain how uplink and downlink traffic are handled in LTE networks
Walk through a high level service flow setup on an end-to-end basis
Explain deployment scenarios of LTE networks

1. Setting the stage


1.1. Transition options to LTE
1.2. Trends for next generation wireless
networks
1.3. LTE network changes
1.4. LTE Air interface changes

2. LTE Network Architecture


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

System Architecture Evolution (SAE)


Network architecture and interfaces
SAE nodes and functions
E-UTRAN - eNodeB
Protocol stacks for network interfaces

7. Deployment
7.1. Typical LTE deployment scenarios

8. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

3. LTE air interface


3.1. Shared radio channel concepts
3.2. OFDM/OFDMA, SOFDMA SC-FDMA
concepts
3.3. Protocol stack
3.4. Air interface channel structure
3.5. Channel characteristics

4. LTE UE operations
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

System acquisition
Synchronization
Initial access procedures
Data service setup

5. LTE Traffic handling


5.1. Downlink traffic handling
5.2. Uplink traffic handling

6. LTE Mobility
6.1. Cell selection/reselection
6.2. Handover
2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v5.0

21

LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview


eLearning | Average Duration: 3 Hours | Course Number: LTE_103

A cellular network consists of a radio network, one or more core networks, and a services network. The LTE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) is the next-generation
core network that is expected to replace the existing/legacy core networks. A typical 3G core network consists of a Circuit Switched Core Network (CS-CN) and
a Packet Switched Core Network (PS-CN). The EPC is an all-IP packet-switched core network that can connect to a variety of radio networks such as the LTEbased E-UTRAN, WCDMA-based UTRAN, GERAN, CDMA2000 1x, 1xEV-DO/HRPD, and WiMAX. The EPC is formally defined by 3GPP as part of the Evolved
Packet System (EPS) that uses an LTE-based EUTRAN. This eLearning course provides an overview of the EPC, including the architecture, basic functions, its
role in session setup, and its support for inter-technology mobility.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a fundamental understanding of
how EPC works in the next-generation cellular network. This includes those
in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network
engineering, or verification role.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Summarize key benefits and challenges of the EPC
Specify roles of various EPC components
Explain the functions (e.g., authentication and security) performed
by the EPC
Describe a high-level session setup using the EPC
Discuss how EPC supports inter-technology handover

Suggested Prerequisites
Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)

Complementary Courses
LTE Overview (eLearning)

1. Introduction to LTE EPC


1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.

Overall cellular system architecture


Motivation for the EPC
Influence of IP convergence
EPC as part of EPS
Role of IMS
Services (VoIP, Web-browsing, and
video streaming) in EPC

5. Seamless Inter-technology
Handover via EPC
5.1. EPC architecture for seamless
mobility
5.2. EPC features in support of
mobility
5.3. Handover scenarios (LTE-UMTS,
LTE-GSM and LTE-1xEV-DO)

2. EPC Architecture
2.1. Core network requirements
2.2. Legacy core networks
2.3. Elements of the EPC (e.g., HSS,
MME, S-GW, and P-GW) and
interfaces

6. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

3. Major Functions of the EPC


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

Authentication and security


Policy charging and control and QoS
Packet routing
Mobility management
IP address allocation

4. Session Setup using EPC


4.1. Overall call flow
4.2. Interaction between the E-UTRAN
and EPC

22

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v3.0

LTE Air Interface Signaling Overview


eLearning |Duration: 3 Hours | Course Number: LTE_111

Long Term Evolution (LTE) is a leading contender for next generation broadband wireless networks, providing an evolution path for a variety of 3G wireless
networks, such as UMTS and 1xEV-DO. LTE offers significantly higher packet data rates, enabling advanced multimedia applications and high-speed Internet
access. This eLearning course takes a look at the LTE air interface and Non-Access Stratum (NAS) signaling operations used to establish and maintain LTE
calls. The key LTE network components and interfaces are described, and then the steps involved in establishing and managing data calls are illustrated,
highlighting the roles of each component and the flow of signaling and data across the network. By the conclusion of this course, the student will have a
deeper understanding of how the UE and the network work together to deliver services to LTE subscribers.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course provides an overview of LTE signaling operations, and is
targeted for a broad audience for a quick reference to LTE operations. This
includes those in engineering, operations, and product sales/marketing.

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


Sketch the key components of a typical LTE network and the
interfaces between them
List the key channels of DL and UL in LTE
Provide an overview of Call setup and related signaling in LTE
Walk through the steps involved in a Network Attach
Discuss the establishment of EPS bearers
Explain how QoS requirements are managed in LTE
Summarize the cell selection and reselection processes for idle UEs
Illustrate how active connections are maintained during handovers

LTE Overview (eLearning)

1.1. E-UTRAN architecture


1.2. EPC (MME, S-GW, P-GW, HSS)

2. LTE Air Interface Signaling Basics

Learning Objectives

Suggested Prerequisites

1. LTE Network Architecture Overview

2.1. LTE frame structure


2.2. LTE channels overview

3. System Acquisition
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Initial attach operation


Default/dedicated bearer setup
Handovers and idle mobility
Inter-RAT handovers

4. Network Attachment and Default


Bearer
4.1. Attachment steps
4.2. Default bearer setup
4.3. IP address allocation

7. Idle Mode
7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.

S1 release
Cell reselection
TAU
Paging

8. Handover
8.1. Handover types
8.2. Measurement
8.3. Handover stages

9. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

5. QoS and Dedicated Bearers


5.1. QoS classes
5.2. QoS enforcement
5.3. Dedicated EPS bearers

6. Uplink and Downlink Traffic


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

CQI
DC1
Downlink traffic operations
Uplink traffic operations

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.0

23

VoLTE Overview

eLearning | Average Duration: 1.5 Hours | Course Number: LTE_112


The LTE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) is an evolution of the 3GPP system architecture with the vision of an all-IP network finally realized. EPC in conjunction with
IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) delivers various services such as VoIP, SMS, Video call, Picture share, IM and Presence. EPC and IMS support interworking
with the existing 2G/3G wireless networks as well as PSTN to facilitate smooth migration, seamless mobility and service continuity across these networks. This
eLearning module provides an overview of supporting voice services using LTE, which is known as Voice over LTE (VoLTE). LTE-EPC, IMS, and the PCC are
discussed as the building blocks for VoLTE. The pre-call operations such as connectivity with the IMS network and IMS registration are explained along with
VoLTE call setup and configuration. Interworking between LTE and PSTN is discussed. Basic means of supporting SMS in LTE are also summarized.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is an overview of Voice over LTE, and is targeted for a broad
audience. This audience includes those in planning, Integration,
operations, and end-to-end service deployment groups.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List various solutions for delivering voice in LTE networks.


Describe the role of LTE-EPC, PCC, and IMS in VoLTE.
Specify the roles of key IMS and PCC nodes.
Sketch inter-connectivity of LTE-EPC, IMS, and PCC nodes to deliver
an end-to-end IMS call.
Summarize main steps of pre-call operations such as IMS
registration.
Describe the main steps of setting up a VoLTE call.
Specify how SMS can be supported in LTE.

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE Overview (eLearning)
Overview of IMS (eLearning)

24

1. Overview of EPS

1.1. Supporting voice services in LTE


1.2. Overall network architecture (EPS,
IMS, PCC)
1.3. Initial attach
1.4. Default vs. dedicated EPS bearers
1.5. Connectivity with IMS APN

2. Connectivity Among EPS, IMS, and


PCC
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

Overview of IMS elements


Overview of PCC elements
QoS model in LTE
Connectivity of IMS, LTE-EPC & PCC

5. VoLTE-Scenarios
5.1. LTE-PSTN interworking and role of
IMS
5.2. Overview of Single Radio Voice
Call Continuity (SRVCC)
5.3. Supporting SMS in LTE

6. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

3. Pre-Call IMS Functions for VoLTE


3.1. PDN connection to IMS
3.2. P-CSCF discovery
3.3. IMS registration

4. VoLTE Call Setup


4.1. Overall steps for an all-IP call
4.2. PCC-IMS interactions
4.3. Dedicated bearer setup

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.0

Overview of IPv6 in LTE Networks (coming soon)


eLearning | Average Duration: 3 Hours

Long Term Evolution (LTE) is universally accepted as the next generation broadband wireless system based on an All-IP network. Each LTE device would need
at least one IP address to communicate and obtain services like web browsing, machine-to-machine communication, voice and video services, SMS, etc. As
the number of IP connected nodes continue to grow, the current IPv4-NAT architecture no longer suffices and we must consider a transition to IPv6 protocol.
This eLearning course explores the IPv6 protocol, its features and capabilities and describes how LTE networks assign IPv6 addresses to LTE devices. It
describes IPv6 address format, assignment of IPv6 address to LTE devices, dual-stack IPv4v6 addressing to facilitate smooth transition, and IPv4-IPv6
interworking. In conclusion, the student will understand the use of IPv6 addresses and IPv6 operations in LTE networks.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is an overview of IPv6 addressing formats and IPv6


assignment operation in LTE networks, and is targeted for a broad
audience. This includes those in planning, provisioning, operations, and
end-to-end service deployment groups.

1.1. LTE-EPC network architecture


1.2. PDN connections
1.3. IP address assignment in LTE

2. IPv4 in Wireless Networks

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

1. Setting the Stage

Sketch LTE-EPC network architecture and identify the role of IPv6


Analyze the limitations of IPv4 addresses
List the key aspects of IPv6
Sketch the IPv6 addressing architecture and addressing formats
Discuss different UE IP address allocation schemes in LTE
Describe the use of dual stack IPv4/IPv6 in LTE Networks
Describe some IPv4 and IPv6 interworking scenarios
Explain IPv6 address assignment scenarios of LTE networks

2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

IPv4 address formats


Use of public and private addresses
Mobility support GTP and mobile IP
Limitations of IPv4

3. IPv6 Essentials
3.1. Key aspects of IPv6
3.2. Ipv6 header description
3.3. IPv6 addressing

4. IPv6 Assignment in LTE Networks


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

Default bearer setup operation


IPv6 address allocation
Role of NAS signaling
Assignment of dual-stack IPv4/IPv6
addresses

5. IPv4/IPv6 Transition Mechanisms


5.1. Dual stack addressing
5.2. Tunnels
5.3. Translators

6. IPv6 Deployment in LTE Networks


6.1. Dual-stack connectivity
6.2. IPv6 migration scenarios

Put It All Together


Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.0

25

The Road to LTE

Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: LTE_106


To meet the rapidly growing IP data traffic in wireless networks, wireless service providers have started deploying the next generation wireless networks. The
next generation wireless networks need to contain the cost of delivering lots of traffic as the ARPU is not expected to increase at the same rate as the amount
of data exchanged over these wireless networks. So, service providers are deploying efficient air interface such as LTE, emerging backhaul and transport
technologies (Carrier Ethernet, MPLS) as well as multimedia application framework (IMS) solutions. This course provides an overview of the LTE-EPC and IMS
wireless systems and related technologies.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course provides an overview of the LTE and IMS networks and is
intended for those in business and non-engineering functions as well as
those who are involved in planning, design, and deployment.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
List the key requirements of LTE networks
Sketch the LTE-EPC network components and their interfaces
Describe the role of Policy and Charging Control (PCC) framework to
support QoS in LTE-EPC networks
Sketch the LTE Evolved-UTRAN network and describe the ways of
achieving high data rates and reduced delays in LTE
List the backhaul options and describe the use of Carrier Ethernet
and MPLS in backhaul/backbone networks
Describe the role of IMS in LTE networks and sketch IMS network
architecture
Discuss IMS interworking with legacy networks and Web
Describe the need for IPv6 in LTE networks
Step through example LTE deployment scenarios

Suggested Prerequisites
Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)
LTE Overview (eLearning)

26

1. The Next Generation Network


1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.

Trends in the wireless industry


State of wireless networks
Motivation and goals of 4G networks
4G evolution landscape
Building block technologies
Current status of LTE

2. LTE Radio Network


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

All-IP E-UTRAN architecture


LTE air interface overview
OFDM and multiple antenna overview
Peak and achievable data rates
Spectrum and bandwidth

6. IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS)


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.
6.6.

IMS benefits and challenges


IMS network architecture
End-to-end IMS session setup
End-to-end QoS model
Interworking with legacy networks
Services in IMS

7. Mobility and Interworking


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.

Need for IPv6


Interworking with 3G networks
Deployment scenarios
Interconnection with IMS and IPX

3. LTE-EPC Networks
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.

All-IP network architecture


Network nodes and Interfaces
Features and services
PCC framework for QoS support
Device categories and SIM
Migration to LTE-EPC network

4. LTE Operations Essentials


4.1. Initial attach/registration
4.2. IP address assignment
4.3. IP network connectivity

5. Backhaul/Backbone for LTE Networks


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.

Backhaul needs
Backhaul network architecture
Backhaul options
Role of Carrier Ethernet backhaul
Role of IP/MPLS in backbone

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.4

LTE Essentials

Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: LTE_101


Long Term Evolution (LTE) is a 4th generation wireless network technology based on OFDM and MIMO. It provides much higher data rates (over 100 Mbps) to
users while reducing the cost-per-bit for service providers. This is very exciting to wireless operators who are eager to deploy multimedia-rich Internet content
over a wireless medium with seamless access anywhere at any time. This one day course provides an overview of LTE from both application and technical
aspects. It gives an overview of the network architecture, the underlying technologies of OFDM and multiple antenna techniques, and the call setup procedure.
In addition, the deployment and interworking issues are explored. It also describes the competitive landscape by comparing features and services of other 4G
systems such as WiMAX. In summary, this course provides a comprehensive high level view of LTE.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course provides a comprehensive high level view of LTE and is
intended for those in business and non-engineering functions as well as
those who need to understand LTE and its place in the 4G wireless
landscape.

1. LTE Overview

Learning Objectives

2. LTE/EPC Networks

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


List the key goals and requirements of LTE
Identify the following aspects of LTE networks:
System architecture
Radio access network and air interface details
Applications and Quality of Service (QoS)
Call setup procedures
Mobility support

Describe the underlying technologies of LTE: OFDM and MIMO


List key planning aspects of deploying LTE, such as multiple
antennas and backhaul planning

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE Overview (eLearning)

1.1. Trends for 4G networks


1.2. Goals and requirements of LTE
1.3. LTE strengths and challenges
2.1. Architecture goals
2.2. EPS (SAE) system architecture
2.3. Network nodes and interfaces

3. LTE Air Interface


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Concepts of OFDMA and SC-FDMA


Multiple antenna techniques in LTE
LTE frame structure
Overview of DL/UL channels

6. LTE Deployment
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.

Supported frequency spectrums


Frequency planning
Multiple antennas planning
Backhaul planning
LTE performance examples (VoIP
capacity, throughput, and
latency)

Appendix A: Additional Topics


A.1 LTE and WiMAX feature
comparison
A.2 Interworking of LTE with 3GPP and
Non-3GPP networks

4. LTE Services
4.1. QoS support in LTE
4.2. Security in LTE

5. Life of an LTE Mobile


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.

System acquisition
Registration and call setup
Data transmission in DL and UL
Activities in idle and active modes
Mobility and handover in LTE

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.9

27

LTE Technology Overview

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: LTE_201


Long Term Evolution (LTE) is a radio technology based on OFDM and MIMO technologies. LTE provides much higher data rates (over 100 Mbps) to users while
reducing the cost-per-bit for service providers. This is very exciting to wireless operators who are eager to deploy multimedia rich Internet content over a
wireless medium with seamless access anywhere at any time. This course describes the simplified architecture of LTE and moves on to OFDM and MIMO. The
course also covers the downlink and uplink frame structure, OFDM operations at the physical layer, and resource management and scheduling considerations
at the MAC layer. It steps through system acquisition, call setup, traffic operations and handover. The deployment and interworking issues with 2G/3G wireless
networks are also explored. In summary, this course provides a comprehensive overview of LTE technology.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course provides a comprehensive overview and a technical
introduction to LTE. It is suitable for engineers in network planning and
design, product design and development, network deployment, network
performance, and network operations.

1. Introduction

Learning Objectives

2. LTE Architecture and Protocols

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


List the requirements and capabilities of LTE
Explain the network architecture of E-UTRAN and EPC
Sketch the architecture of security, policy and charging control
(PCC), and IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) and their interactions
with EPC
Describe the use of OFDM and multiple antenna techniques in LTE
Describe the key concepts in the LTE air interface
List steps for network acquisition and EPS bearer setup
Describe the traffic operation in DL and UL
List mobility and handover procedures
Describe various ways to support voice and SMS services in LTE
networks
Explain LTE interworking with 2G/3G wireless networks
Identify the planning aspects of deploying an LTE network

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE Overview (eLearning)

28

1.1. 4G technology and market drivers


1.2. Goals and requirements of LTE
1.3. LTE building blocks
2.1. E-UTRAN and EPC
2.2. Roles of eNB, MME, S-GW, P-GW,
and HSS
2.3. Key interfaces: S1, X2, S6a, S5, and
S11
2.4. Role of IMS in LTE networks
2.5. Evolution path from current networks
2.6. UE categories

3. LTE Air Interface


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Orthogonality
Use of OFDM in LTE
MIMO (SU-MIMO, MU-MIMO)
LTE air interface channels

4. Initial Attach
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.
4.6.
4.7.

System acquisition
Random access procedures
RRC connection
Initial attach
Authentication and security
Default bearer setup
IP address allocation

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

5. QoS Support in LTE


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.

PCC framework
EPS bearers and SDFs
Dedicated bearer setup
QoS in LTE
Traffic operations in DL and UL

6. Idle Mode Mobility and Handover


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

Idle mode operations


Cell reselection
Tracking Area Update
X2 handover

7. Services in LTE
7.1. Voice support in LTE: CS-Fallback,
VoLTE, and SR-VCC
7.2. Support for SMS

8. Interworking and Deployment


8.1. Interworking with 2G/3G wireless
networks
8.2. Deployment considerations
8.3. Frequency planning
8.4. Capacity planning

v2.2

Exploring IPv6 for LTE Networks

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: LTE_202


The roots of the current Internet stretch back over twenty years to its beginnings in academic institutions. The fact that it has been able to adapt and scale to
todays global network is a testament to the solid design principles used in its creation. However, as the number of Internet nodes continues to grow and new
demands are expected on it as we evolve our 2G/3G networks to LTE, the current IPv4-NAT architecture no longer suffices and we must consider a transition
to an updated protocol. This course explores the IPv6 protocol, which brings not only a vast address space to address millions of billions of network nodes but
also a bag of new tricks. Streamlined and simplified, IPv6 incorporates a number of companion protocols into its core specification. This course covers these
general topics as well as the adoption of IPv6 in LTE Networks.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This is an introductory course and does not assume any previous


knowledge of IPv6. It is suitable for wireless professionals who want to gain
awareness of IPv4s real limitations, the key issues with IPv6s new
capabilities, and how to transition the networks. The course assumes basic
knowledge of LTE EPC and the LTE Network Architecture and functions.

After completing this course, the student will be able to:

1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.

LTE-EPC network architecture


IMS architecture
PDN connections and APNs
The role of IP in LTE

2. IPv4 in Wireless Networks

Learning Objectives

1. LTE-EPC Networks

Sketch LTE-EPC network architecture and identify the role of IPv6


Analyze the limitations of IPv4 networks
List the key aspects of IPv6
Sketch the IPv6 addressing architecture and the new types of IP
addresses
Describe the Plug-n-Play capabilities of IPv6
Describe wireless mobility solutions in IPv6
Identify the impact of IPv6 on related protocols
Describe the use of dual stack IPv4/IPv6 in LTE Networks
Discuss the different UE IP allocation schemes
Describe some IPv4 and IPv6 interworking scenarios

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE Overview (eLearning)
LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (eLearning)

2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

IP requirements
IPv4 header description
IPv4 addressing
Mobility support
Issues with IPv4

3. IPv6 Essentials
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.

Key aspects of IPv6


IPv4 vs. IPv6 datagrams
IPv6 addressing
IPsec
QoS
Packet sizes and payloads

6. Wireless Mobility in LTE using IPv6


6.1. IP Mobility the problem
6.2. GPRS Tunneling Protocol (GTP)

7. IPv6 Deployment in LTE Networks


7.1. Dual-stack connectivity
7.2. IPv6 migration scenarios
7.3. Dual-stack deployment combined
with NAPT44
7.4. Gateway-initiated dual-stack lite
7.5. MS/UE IPv6-only deployment
with stateful NAT64 support
7.6. IP in LTE: Example deployment
scenarios

4. IPv6-IPv4 Assignment in LTE Networks


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

Auto-configuration
EPS bearers
Default EPS bearer setup
IP address allocation
4.4.1. Via NAS signaling
4.4.2. Via IETF approaches

5. IPv4/IPv6 Transition Mechanisms


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

Overview
Dual stack
Tunnels
Translators

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.2

29

VoLTE and IMS in LTE-EPC Networks


Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: LTE_203

The LTE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) is an evolution of the 3GPP system architecture with the vision of an all-IP network finally realized. EPC in conjunction with
IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) delivers various services such as VoIP, SMS, Video call, Picture share, IM and Presence. EPC and IMS support mobility with the
existing 2G/3G wireless networks as well as PSTN to facilitate smooth migration, interworking and service continuity across these networks. This course
provides a detailed look at the architecture of the LTE EPC, IMS and QoS framework to deliver end-to-end voice (Voice over LTE VoLTE) in LTE networks. It
also covers various service scenario walk-throughs that utilize IMS and EPC network components. The IMS service architecture and the interaction with
existing services are described.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is designed for those involved in deployment and engineering


of next generation wireless networks and services based on LTE-EPC and
IMS.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Sketch the EPC architecture and describe the role of various nodes
in establishing a data session in LTE for IMS signaling
Sketch the IMS network architecture and identify the role of key
network nodes, interfaces, and related protocols
List various protocols used in IMS networks to support VoIP
Step through the IMS registration procedure
Explain the role of the PCC network to deliver QoS
Step through the interactions between LTE-EPC and IMS nodes to
establish a VoIP call
Step through the interworking of IMS with non-IMS networks such
as PSTN
Describe the IMS services architecture
Discuss role of AS, RCS, MMTel, and ICS, and support for legacy
services
Sketch the charging architecture in LTE-EPC and IMS networks

Suggested Prerequisites
Overview of IMS (eLearning)
LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (eLearning)

30

1. LTE/EPC Network Essentials


1.1. LTE-EPC network architecture
1.2. Network nodes and roles of HSS,
MME, S-GW, P-GW, and PCRF
1.3. Network interfaces and protocols

2. IMS Architecture
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

IMS network architecture


Role of CSCF, MGCF, MGW, HSS, AS
User addressing in IMS
End-to-end signaling and traffic flow

3. Protocols for VoIP and IMS


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Diameter
SIP and SDP
H.248 (Megaco)
RTP and RTCP

4. VoLTE Pre-Call Functions


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

PDN connection for IMS APN


Default EPS bearer setup
IMS registration
IMS authentication

5. QoS Framework in LTE-EPC


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.

QoS classes in LTE-EPC


PCC architecture
PCRF, PCEF, and AS
Interfaces: Gx, Rx
SDF, SDF aggregation, TFT

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

6. VoLTE Call Management


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.

VoIP call setup in IMS


PCC interactions
SIP/SDP message details
Media format considerations
Emergency calls

7. Interworking in IMS
7.1. IMS PSTN interworking
7.2. Roaming in IMS
7.3. Role of IPX

8. IMS Services Framework


8.1. Service architecture and role of
AS
8.2. Telephony Application server
(TAS)
8.3. Example supplementary services
8.4. Role of RCS and MMTel

9. SMS over IP Using IMS


9.1. SMS delivery architecture
9.2. SMS origination and termination
9.3. SMS interworking

10. IMS Charging Architecture


10.1. Overview of network nodes
10.2. Offline and online charging

v1.3

Mastering LTE Air Interface

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: LTE_301


Long Term Evolution (LTE) is a 4th generation (4G) wireless technology that promises a much higher air interface data rate (over 100 Mbps) to users while
reducing the cost per bit for wireless service providers. The building blocks of LTE include OFDM, multiple antenna techniques, and all-IP technologies.
Multiple antennas can increase data rates, throughput, coverage, and lower battery consumption in a mobile device. This course provides an in-depth
discussion of the LTE air interface. First, it introduces the LTE/E-UTRAN network architecture and protocols. It then provides comprehensive coverage of the
frame structure, channels, resource allocation, and multiple antenna techniques. Finally, the course discusses the operations of acquisition, system access,
data session setup, DL and UL traffic operations and handovers.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This is a detailed technical course, primarily intended for a technical
audience, including those in RF design, development, integration,
deployment and systems engineering.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Sketch the LTE/E-UTRAN network architecture and associated
interfaces and protocols
Sketch the frame structure and resource mapping for DL and UL
List various multiple antenna techniques of LTE
List LTE channels in DL and UL and map them on the frame
structure
Describe the synchronization operation and use of sync and
reference signals
Step through the system access and data session setup procedure
Describe traffic operations in DL CQI reporting, scheduling, MCS
selection and HARQ feedback
Describe traffic operations in UL Scheduling request, UL grants,
UL transmission and HARQ feedback
Explain key concepts of LTE mobility and handovers

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE Overview (eLearning)

1. Introduction
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.

Goals and requirements of LTE


E-UTRAN nodes and interfaces
LTE air interface protocols
UE categories
Life of a UE in LTE

2. LTE Air Interface Essentials


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

OFDMA and SC-FDMA


PHY frame structure
PHY channels and signals
MIMO techniques in LTE

3. System Acquisition
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

DL synchronization
PCI determination
MIB and SIB processing
System selection

4. System Access Operation


4.1. Random access procedure
4.2. UL synchronization
4.3. RRC connection establishment

5. Data Session Setup


5.1. Initial attach
5.2. Default EPS bearer setup

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

6. Downlink Operations
6.1. DL transmission process
6.2. Channel quality indicator (CQI)
reporting
6.3. DL scheduling and resource
allocation
6.4. DL data transmission and HARQ
6.5. DL operations using MIMO

7. Uplink Operations
7.1. UL transmission process
7.2. Bandwidth requests
7.3. UL scheduling and resource
allocation
7.4. UL data transmission and HARQ

8. Mobility and Power Control


8.1. Cell selection
8.2. Cell reselection and tracking area
update
8.3. PHY measurements
8.4. LTE handover overview
8.5. Power control in LTE

Appendix A: OFDM Essentials


A.1. Orthogonality in OFDM
A.2. Cyclic Prefix for ISI
A.3. OFDM transmitter/receiver block
diagram

v1.8

31

LTE Protocols and Signaling

Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: LTE_302


LTE promises dramatic improvements in throughput and latency, which opens a new era in Quality of Service (QoS). These enhancements are based on
several fundamental pillars: A new air interface (OFDM+MIMO), simplified network architecture and efficient air interface structure and signaling mechanisms.
This course takes a detailed look at the layer 2 and 3 signaling procedures as defined in 3GPP specifications. The main focus is on UE-E-UTRAN and UE-EPC
signaling. The course also provides an overview of the end-to-end default and dedicated EPS bearer setup including QoS considerations. Intra-LTE mobility
and LTE-non-LTE interworking are also illustrated.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is primarily intended for a technical audience in design, test,


systems engineering or product support that wants to understand LTE
signaling details.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Sketch the network architecture of LTE
Explain the detailed setup of the RRC connection between the UE
and the E-UTRAN
Describe the roles of the MAC, RLC, PDCP, and RRC protocols
Describe the roles of protocols associated with S1, X2, and NAS
Illustrate the initial attach operation
Explain the implementation of QoS and security
Summarize traffic operations for UL and DL
Describe various handover scenarios and the associated signaling
procedures
Describe interworking between LTE and 3GPP systems and LTE and
non-3GPP systems

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE Overview (eLearning)

32

1. LTE Network Architecture


1.1. Architecture and node functions
1.2. Interfaces and associated protocols
1.3. Identities of the UE, E-UTRAN, and
EPC

2. LTE-Uu Interface Protocols


2.1. PHY frame and channels
2.2. MAC, RLC, PDCP, and RRC

3. E-UTRAN and NAS Protocols


3.1. S1 and X2 interfaces and associated
protocols
3.2. NAS states and functions
3.3. GTPv1 and GTPv2

4. System Acquisition
4.1. Power-up synchronization
4.2. System Information Blocks

5. System Access
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.

Random access
RRC connection setup
Timing alignment
DRX operation
Power control

6. Attach to the Network


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.

Overview of attach
Selection of MME
Authentication and key agreement
Integrity protection and encryption
AS and NAS security

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

7. Initial PDN Connection


7.1. S-GW and P-GW selection
7.2. Default bearer setup
7.3. IP address allocation

8. Idle Mode and Paging


8.1. Paging operation
8.2. Tracking area update

9. Service Establishment and QoS


9.1. QoS parameters
9.2. EPS bearers and TFTs
9.3. PCC architecture

10. Traffic and Bandwidth


Management
10.1. Channel quality reporting
10.2. DL/UL scheduling
10.3. DL/UL traffic operations

11. Mobility
11.1. X2-based mobility
11.2. S1-based mobility

12. Interoperability
12.1. Measurement
12.2. 3GPP mobility
12.3. Non-3GPP mobility

v1.8

Mastering TD-LTE Air Interface


Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days

Time Division Duplex Long Term Evolution (TDD LTE or TD-LTE) is a 4th generation (4G) cellular technology that promises a much higher air interface data rate
(over 100 Mbps) to users while reducing the cost per bit for wireless service providers. The building blocks of TD-LTE include OFDM, multiple antenna
techniques, and all-IP technologies. Multiple antenna techniques could increase data rates, throughput, coverage, and lower battery consumption in a mobile
device. This course provides an in-depth discussion of the PHY and MAC layers of the TD-LTE air interface. First, it introduces the E-UTRAN network
architecture and protocols. The Type 2 PHY frame structure, channels, resource allocation, and multiple antenna techniques are described. Finally, the course
discusses the operations of acquisition, system access, data session setup, DL and UL traffic operations and handover.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This is a detailed technical course, primarily intended for a technical
audience, including those in product design and development, integration
and testing, and system engineering.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Sketch the network architecture
Specify air interface protocols
Draw PHY Type 2 frame structure and resource mapping for DL and
UL
Mention roles of DL and UL PHY channels
Describe the synchronization operation and use of reference signals
Summarize the system acquisition and data session setup
procedure
Describe traffic operations in DL and UL at the PHY/MAC layers
Explain cell reselection and handover
Identify the key multiple antenna techniques for the DL and the UL
and specify their applications

Suggested Prerequisites
Overview of OFDM (eLearning)
Multiple Antenna Techniques (eLearning)
LTE Overview (eLearning)

1. Introduction
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.

Motivation for TD-LTE or TDD LTE


Goals and requirements of LTE
LTE network nodes and interfaces
Comparison of FDD LTE & TDD LTE
LTE air interface protocols
Life of a mobile in LTE

2. TD-LTE Technology
2.1. Access techniques OFDMA and SCFDMA
2.2. TD-LTE Type 2 frame structure
2.3. S- Subframe and subframe patterns
2.4. TD-LTE DL/UL configurations
2.5. PHY channels and resource mapping

3. System Acquisition
3.1. DL synchronization in TD-LTE
3.2. System selection

4. System Access Operation


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

UL synchronization
TD-LTE random access procedure
TD-LTE preamble configurations
RRC connection establishment

5. TD-LTE Call Setup


5.1. Initial attach
5.2. EPS bearer setup

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

6. Downlink Operations
6.1. DL transmission process
6.2. Channel quality reporting
6.3. DL scheduling and resource
allocation
6.4. Data transmission in DL Subframe
6.5. Data transmission in S-Subframe
6.6. HARQ bundling and multiplexing
6.7. DL operations using MIMO

7. Uplink Operations
7.1. UL transmission process
7.2. Bandwidth requests
7.3. UL scheduling and resource
allocation
7.4. UL data transmission and HARQ
7.5. TTI bundling
7.6. UL operations using MIMO

8. Mobility and Power Control


8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.
8.5.

Tracking area
Cell reselection
Paging
Handover message flow
Power control in TD-LTE

Appendix A: OFDM Essentials


(OFDM/OFDMA and SC-FDMA)
Appendix B: Advanced Antenna
Techniques

v1.0

33

LTE and GSM/UMTS Interworking

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: LTE_304


The major focus of this course is the interworking between UMTS/HSPA and LTE. The course begins with a brief overview of LTE and 3GPP 2G/3G network
architectures and requirements for interworking. The building blocks that support interworking between LTE and UMTS/HSPA are discussed in detail, including the
new interfaces, hybrid device capabilities, and radio/core network mechanisms. Different interworking/mobility scenarios are listed and detailed message flows are
given. LTE is optimized for the delivery of IP services including VoIP. It can also cooperate with a 2G/3G network to support a Circuit-Switched (CS) call using features
such as Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC) and CS fallback. The course also previews IP mobility mechanisms, security, and QoS considerations. In summary,
the course provides both the architectural features and the detailed message flows of the interworking between LTE and 3GPP 2G/3G.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course is designed for those involved in the evolution and migration of
UMTS/HSPA networks to LTE networks. It is suitable for planners and
engineers responsible for network planning, design and deployment,
integration and network operations.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Sketch the LTE architecture, including interfaces to GERAN/UTRAN
Describe components/interfaces that make up the LTE core
network and their roles in the interworking
List requirements for LTE and 2G/3G interworking
Sketch the interworking architecture of LTE and GERAN/UTRAN
Walk through an LTE session setup
Enumerate the steps involved in idle mode mobility
Walk through the steps of an active mode handover
Discuss the role of IMS in LTE
Define SRVCC and CS fallback

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE Overview (eLearning)
LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (eLearning)
LTE Technology Overview (Instructor Led)

1. Interworking: Executive Summary


1.1. Evolution from 2G/3G to LTE
1.2. Interworking architecture (Gn-SGSN
and S4-SGSN)
1.3. Voice and SMS interworking
1.4. Overview of interworking scenarios

2. Interworking Network Architecture


2.1. Pre-R8 and R8 UMTS and GERAN
architecture
2.2. Interworking architecture Pre-R8
and R8
2.3. Non-roaming and roaming
architecture
2.4. Network interfaces between
UMTS/GERAN and EPC
2.5. Network identities
2.6. GTPv1 and GTPv2

4.4. LTE UTRAN handover and


UTRAN LTE handover with GnSGSN
4.5. LTE-GERAN interworking

5. Idle Mode Interworking


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

Idle mode cell reselection


Idle mode measurements
System Information Blocks
PLMN selection

6. Circuit-Switched Interworking
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.

IMS overview
Voice in LTE using IMS
CS fallback
SRVCC
IMS service centralization and
continuity

3. Initial Session Setup


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

LTE EPS Attach procedure


UMTS PDP context activation
EPS QoS
UMTS QoS

4. Connected Mode Interworking


4.1. Connected mode IRAT HO
4.2. LTE and UMTS measurements
4.3. LTE UTRAN handover and UTRAN
LTE handover with S4-SGSN

34

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.6

LTE-EPC Networks and Signaling

Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: LTE_305


The LTE Evolved Packet System (EPS) is an evolution of the 3GPP system architecture with the vision of an all-IP network finally realized. EPS consists of the
Evolved UTRAN (E-UTRAN) and Evolved Packet Core (EPC). EPC supports mobility with the existing 3GPP and non-3GPP wireless networks to facilitate smooth
migration, interworking, and service continuity across these networks. The EPC and E-UTRAN will be optimized for the delivery of IP-based services. EPS will
use IMS as the services network and manage QoS across the system, enabling a dynamic mix of voice, video, and data services. This course provides a
detailed look at the architecture of the EPC and the signaling among the UE, E-UTRAN and EPC network components.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course is designed for those involved in development, integration,
deployment and engineering of LTE-EPC wireless systems.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Sketch the EPC architecture


Describe the components that make up the EPC and their roles
List the key protocols of LTE-EPC like NAS, GTP and Diameter
Explain how authentication and security are achieved in the EPC
Describe the different options for IP address allocation
Describe an EPS bearer setup
Explain the role of the PCC network
Explain how services are added and how QoS requirements are
managed
Describe connectivity to multiple APNs (PDN connections)
Explain X2- and S1-based handovers
Describe deployment considerations

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE Overview (eLearning)
LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (eLearning)

1. LTE-EPC Network Architecture


1.1. Roaming and non-roaming
architecture
1.2. Roles of HSS, MME, S-GW, P-GW,
and PCRF
1.3. Key features and services

2. LTE-EPC Protocols
2.1. Roles of EMM and ESM
2.2. GTPv2-C and GTP-U
2.3. Roles of SCTP and diameter

3. LTE-EPC Signaling Fundamentals


3.1. Network and UE identities
3.2. EPS and signaling bearers
3.3. PDN connections and APNs

4. Security in LTE-EPC
4.1. Security architecture
4.2. Authentication and Key Agreement
(AKA)
4.3. NAS and AS security

5. Network Access in LTE-EPC


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

Initial attach procedure


MME, S-GW and P-GW selection
Default EPS bearer setup
IP address allocation

6. QoS Framework in LTE-EPC


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

PCC architecture
AF, PCRF, PCEF, SPR
QoS class identifiers
Traffic flow templates

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

7. Session Establishment and PDN


Connectivity
7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
7.5.
7.6.

Dedicated EPS bearer setup


Multiple PDN connectivity
EMM states
Paging operation
Dedicated bearer deactivation
Dedicated bearer modification

8. Intra-LTE Mobility
8.1. X2-based handover
8.2. S1-based handover
8.3. Tracking area updates

9. IMS and Support for Voice


9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.

IMS and seamless mobility


Circuit-Switched Fallback (CSFB)
Voice Call Continuity (VCC)
Single Radio Voice Call Continuity
(SRVCC)

10. Deployment Considerations


10.1. Evolving to EPC network
10.2. Interworking with Release 8 and
Pre-Release 8 3GPP networks
10.3. Interworking with Non-3GPP
networks

11. End-to-End Flow


11.1. Review of attach procedure
11.2. Review of service addition

v1.9

35

LTE-Advanced Technical Overview

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: LTE_310


To meet the rapidly growing IP data traffic demand cost-effectively and to improve cell-edge performance, 3GPP has defined the evolution of Release 8 LTE
called LTE-Advanced. LTE-Advanced is introduced in Release 10 of 3GPP. Some of the LTE-Advanced features are targeted for Release 11 and beyond. LTEAdvanced is designed to meet or exceed the requirements of IMT-Advanced such as the support for the data rate of 1 Gbps and bandwidths up to 100 MHz.
LTE-Advanced system is backward compatible with LTE. This course provides a technical overview of LTE-Advanced, describing the features such as carrier
aggregation, enhanced advanced antenna techniques for the DL and the UL, relays, and coordinated multipoint (CoMP) transmission and reception. In
summary, this course provides a technical overview of R10 and beyond.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course is intended for those involved in engineering functions such as
planning, product management, design and deployment as well as those
who need to understand LTE-Advanced and its place in the 4G wireless
landscape.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List the performance targets for IMT-Advanced and LTE-Advanced


Summarize architectural enhancements relative to Release 8
Describe the key features of Release 10 LTE-Advanced
Explain the key features of LTE-Advanced beyond Release 10
Identify the enhancements required in an LTE network to migrate to
LTE-Advanced
Give examples of deployment scenarios for LTE-Advanced including
heterogeneous networks (HetNets)

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE Overview (eLearning)
Mastering LTE Air Interface (Instructor Led)

36

1. Overview of LTE-Advanced
1.1. Evolution from Release 8 LTE to
LTE-Advanced
1.2. Performance targets of IMTAdvanced and LTE-Advanced
1.3. Summary of LTE-Advanced features

2. EPS Network Architecture


2.1. R8 architecture
2.2. Enhanced HeNBs with support for
mobility
2.3. Relays
2.4. UE categories

3. Network Acquisition and Attach


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Power-up system acquisition


Random access
Attach
Overview of data transmission in DL
and UL

4. Release 10 Air Interface


Enhancements

5. Release 11 and Beyond


5.1. Coordinated multipoint (CoMP)
transmission and reception
5.2. Heterogeneous networks
(HetNets) and eICIC
5.3. Interference cancellation

6. Mobilty for an LTE-Advanced UE


6.1. Cell reselection and handover
6.2. Idle to connected transition
6.3. Dormant to active transition

7. Deployment Considerations
7.1. Migration to LTE-Advanced
7.2. HetNet and SON considerations
7.3. Interworking of LTE-Advanced with
other RATs

Appendix Release 9
Enhancements

4.1. Carrier aggregation


4.2. Enhanced multiple antenna
techniques for DL and UL
4.3. SON enhancements (e.g.,
minimization of drive tests)

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.2

LTE RF Planning and Design Certification Workshop


Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days | Course Number: LTE_401

The LTE system supports broadband wireless access in a mobile cellular environment, and is considered a 4G wireless system, offering data rates in the range
of 100 Mbps. The LTE system is based on the OFDM-based radio air interface. The LTE system also deploys advanced antenna techniques to increase the
throughput, coverage and capacity of the network. Thus, deploying the LTE system provides a unique and challenging opportunity. This workshop covers the
radio network planning and design aspects of an LTE network and describes the process of mapping the service and market requirements to RF system
parameters. Typical parameter settings used in commercial networks are discussed. This certification workshop utilizes several hands-on exercises and a
coverage prediction tool for RF design project and concludes with a certification assessment.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This workshop provides practical examples and intertwines the exercises


at every stage of the RF planning and design process and is intended for
LTE system designers, RF systems engineering, network engineering,
deployment and operations personnel.
After completing this workshop, the student will be able to:
Explain the process of radio network planning and design
Describe the frame structure, DL and UL channels, and key
measurements like RSRP and RSRQ of the LTE air interface
Map the network requirements to corresponding system parameters
Step through the UL and DL link budget for the LTE system
Design the radio network based on coverage and capacity
requirements
Explain multiple antenna techniques in LTE and selection
considerations
Describe key configuration and operational parameters
Discuss parameter settings for a typical commercial network
Identify the key performance indicators of LTE radio network
Describe the key parameters related to Inter-RAT operation

PC laptop with administrator privileges

Suggested Prerequisites
Overview of OFDM (eLearning)
LTE Overview (eLearning)
LTE Technology Overview (Instructor Led)

1.1. Radio network design goals, inputs


and outputs
1.2. Radio network planning process

2. LTE Air Interface

Learning Objectives

Required Equipment

1. Overview of Radio Network Design

2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

FDD frame structure


PHY channels and signals
Resource element and RBs
UE measurement: RSRP and RSRQ
Exercises of RSRP/RSRQ

3. Market and Engineering Requirements


3.1. Coverage/capacity/QoS
3.2. System configuration considerations
3.3. Engineering requirements

4. Link Budget for LTE


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

Cell edge throughput calculations


Link budget for UL and DL
Role of RRH and TMA
Exercises of UL/DL link budget

5. RF Design Considerations
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

RF design guidelines
RF design tool configuration
Coverage prediction
Exercises: Coverage and interference

6. MIMO Antenna Considerations


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

6.5. Exercise: Coverage predictions


using MIMO

7. Capacity Planning in LTE


7.1. Data traffic modeling and
capacity predictions
7.2. Sector throughput calculations
7.3. Backhaul capacity planning
7.4. Triggers for capacity planning
7.5. Simulation exercise

8. RF Configuration Parameters
8.1. PCI planning guidelines
8.2. UL Reference signal planning
8.3. RA Preamble planning

9. RF Operational Parameters
9.1. Cell selection/reselection
parameters
9.2. Handover parameters
9.3. Power control parameters

10. KPIs in LTE Radio Network


10.1. User-centric KPIs
10.2. Network performance KPIs
10.3. System utilization KPIs

11. Interworking with 2G/3G


11.1. System selection/reselection
11.2. Inter-RAT handover parameters

Multiple antenna techniques in LTE


Antenna technique switching
Antenna selection criteria
Antenna sharing considerations

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.7

37

LTE RAN Signaling and Operations Certification


Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days | Course Number: LTE_405

Long Term Evolution (LTE) is an all-IP wireless system that promises dramatic improvements in throughput and latency. The LTE enhancements are based on
several fundamental pillars: a new air interface (OFDM+MIMO), simplified network architecture and efficient air interface structure and signaling mechanisms.
This course takes a detailed look at various call scenarios of the LTE radio network using signaling messages and related parameters. It provides details of
system access, initial attach, default/dedicated bearer setup, handovers and inter-RAT operations. At appropriate instances, the LTE operations are compared
with similar operations of 1x/1xEV-DO or UMTS networks. This certification workshop utilizes several hands-on exercises, a drive-test tool, and concludes
with a certification assessment.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course is primarily intended for a technical audience in RF
engineering, systems engineering, network engineering, support,
operations, and anyone seeking a more in depth understanding of LTE
signaling details.

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


Sketch the network architecture of the LTE E-UTRAN and EPC
List and describe the use of DL and UL channels of LTE
Step through the system acquisition process in LTE and understand
the system selection parameters
Analyze the UE logs to get deeper understanding of system access
parameters of SIB 2
Step through the system access and the initial attach operation,
including security and IP address assignment
Explain the implementation and enforcement of QoS for calls such
as VoIP
Summarize traffic operations for UL and DL
Describe various handover scenarios and the associated signaling
procedures
Describe inter-system handover mechanisms, in particular the LTE
to 3G/2G scenario

LTE Overview (eLearning)


LTE Technology Overview (Instructor Led)

38

1.1. E-UTRAN architecture


1.2. LTE-Uu, S1 and X2 interfaces
1.3. Protocols of LTE RAN

2. LTE Air Interface

Learning Objectives

Suggested Prerequisites

1. LTE Network Architecture

2.1. LTE frame structure of DL and UL


2.2. LTE channels overview
2.3. Identities of UE, eNB and EPC

3. System Acquisition
3.1. Cell-ID detection and synchronization
3.2. System Information Blocks (SIBs)
3.3. RF configuration and operations
parameters

4. Connecting to LTE RAN


4.1. Random access operation
4.2. UE and eNB timing alignment
4.3. RRC connection setup

5. Attach to the Network


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

Authentication
Selection of MME, S-GW, and P-GW
Default bearer establishment
AS and NAS security

6. Quality Of Service in LTE


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

QoS parameters
Dedicated EPS bearers and TFTs
Dedicated bearer setup
Data radio bearers in LTE

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

7. Traffic and Bandwidth Management


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
7.5.
7.6.
7.7.
7.8.

DL traffic processing
Feedback: CQI, PMI, RI
UL traffic processing
Buffer status reports
Scheduling
Time alignment
Closed loop power control
Discontinuous reception

8. Mobility and Idle Mode


8.1. Types of measurements
8.2. Cell reselection and TAU
operation
8.3. Paging operation
8.4. DRX operation in Idle mode

9. Handover
9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.
9.5.

Measurement configuration
Measurement types
Handovers
X2-based handovers
S1-based handovers

10. Interoperability
10.1. Comparison of measurements
between LTE and 2G/3G
10.2. Inter-RAT handover preparation
10.3. Inter-RAT handover execution

Certification Assessment

v1.6

LTE-EPC Capacity Planning Certification Workshop


Instructor Led | Duration: 4 Days

LTE (Long Term Evolution) uses the Evolved Packet Core (EPC) architecture, a distributed and unified IP-based core network, to efficiently deliver Internet
services to mobile wireless subscribers. This course describes typical LTE network architecture and deployment strategies, as the starting point for
understanding the planning and design principles for the EPC. Students build up a network call model, determining the node and interface requirements
needed to support the expected user traffic and signaling demands. Subscriber traffic demand, basic LTE operations, mobility and idle state functions, and
interworking scenarios are all factored in to the model. Finally, redundancy and load balancing considerations are factored in, resulting in a network design
that meets the markets needs. This certification workshop includes several hands-on exercises and concludes with a certification assessment.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course is designed for network engineers, architects, and managers
involved in planning, design, deployment and operation of LTE-EPC
networks.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Define the key components of the LTE-EPC network models and
determine the necessary inputs and expected outputs
Describe the logical and physical LTE network architecture
Create a subscriber demand (traffic) model and estimate the impact
on the EPC user plane
Map typical LTE signaling operations to the corresponding nodes
and interfaces and model their impacts on the EPC control plane
Quantify the impact of IMS and PCC services on the EPC user and
control planes
Use the resulting network model to design an EPC network capable
of supporting the subscriber demand

Required Equipment
PC laptop

1. EPC Network Planning


1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.

Network planning process


Subscriber demand modeling
Event impact modeling
Node and link capacity modeling

2. LTE EPC Design Considerations


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.

Logical and physical architecture


Geographic distribution
3G interworking
Network design goals
EPC node and link capabilities
Capacity requirements

3. Subscriber Traffic Modeling


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.

Subscriber demand model


Elastic vs. inelastic traffic
VoIP requirements
Effective bandwidth estimation
Subscriber demand estimation
Connection and bearer requirements
Traffic modeling exercise

4. LTE Signaling Event Modeling

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (eLearning)
LTE-EPC Networks and Signaling (Instructor Led)

4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.
4.6.

Event impact model


Network attach signaling
Default bearer establishment
MME pools and selection
Idle/connected transitions
Signaling event modeling exercise

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

5. LTE Mobility Modeling


5.1. X2-based handover signaling
5.2. S1-based handover signaling
5.3. Mobility modeling exercise

6. Idle State Modeling


6.1. Tracking area planning
6.2. Paging strategies
6.3. Idle state modeling exercise

7. 3G Interworking Modeling
7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.

Circuit-Switched Fallback (CSFB)


SMS signaling
Inter-RAT mobility
Interworking modeling exercise

8. IMS and PCC Modeling


8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.
8.5.

IMS network nodes and interfaces


Policy and Charging Control (PCC)
End-to-end VoIP call
Dedicated bearer establishment
IMS and PCC modeling exercise

9. LTE-EPC Design Case Study


9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.
9.5.

Transaction requirements
Bearer requirements
Subscriber requirements
Bandwidth requirements
Impact of demand changes

Certification Assessment
v1.0

39

LTE RAN Capacity Planning Certification Workshop


Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days

This course defines a practical approach to LTE RAN capacity planning, and applies the concepts to design and augment LTE network. Throughout the class,
students build up RAN capacity models based on typical network operations, determining the eNB, air interface and backhaul requirements needed to support
the expected user traffic and signaling demands. In addition, E-UTRAN counters and KPIs are defined to allow operators to measure and assess the
performance of the network, to identify potential system bottlenecks. Typical LTE operations and mobility requirements are factored in, resulting in a RAN
design that meets the expected demand and is capable of growing to support future services. This certification workshop utilizes several hands-on exercises
to build a capacity planning model and concludes with a certification assessment.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course is designed for RAN and systems engineers involved in
capacity planning, design, deployment and operation of LTE network.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Define the key components of the LTE RAN network models and
determine the necessary inputs and expected outputs
Create a subscriber demand (traffic) model and estimate the impact
on the user plane for both data and VoIP services
Map typical LTE signaling operations to the corresponding nodes
and interfaces and model their impacts on the control plane
Determine the air interface capacity and expected cell throughput
for the subscriber demand
Estimate VoLTE user capacity
Use network counters and KPIs to assess potential air interface and
software licensing bottlenecks

Required Equipment
PC laptop

Suggested Prerequisites
LTE Overview (eLearning)
Mastering LTE Air Interface (Instructor Led)

40

1. Prologue
1.1. E-UTRAN architecture
1.2. RAN capacity constraints
1.3. Capacity planning model

2. RAN Capacity Planning


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

Physical and logical interfaces


eNB node and link capability
Subscriber and event models
Capacity requirements

3. Subscriber Traffic Modeling


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.

Subscriber demand model


Elastic vs. inelastic traffic
VoIP/Video bandwidth requirements
Effective bandwidth estimation
Subscriber demand estimation
Connection and bearer requirements
Traffic modeling exercise

4. LTE Signaling Event Analysis


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.
4.6.
4.7.

Event impact model


Network attach
Default bearer establishment
Dedicated bearer establishment
Idle/connected transitions
Signaling capacity impact
Signaling event model exercise

2013 Award
Award
Solutions,
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013
Solutions,
Inc.

5. LTE Mobility Event Analysis


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.

X2-based handover
S1-based handover
Impact of Paging and TAU
IRAT transitions
Mobility impact exercise

6. Air Interface Capacity Analysis


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.
6.6.

Air interface constraints


Expected cell throughput
Resource Block utilization
Capacity planning for VoIP
Backhaul considerations
Capacity monitoring (counters,
KPIs) examples
6.7. Capacity planning exercise

7. LTE RAN Design Case Study


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
7.5.
7.6.

Transaction requirements
Bearer requirements
Subscriber requirements
Bandwidth requirements
Impact of demand changes
Capacity growth strategies

Certification Assessment

v1.0

Emerging Trends
Mobile wireless networks are evolving at a rapid pace to offer faster and more efficient Internet connectivity and advanced multimedia communications.
Network operators, service providers, and equipment vendors are faced with major decisions to position themselves for the future. True capabilities,
current deployment status, and potential commercial impact of the many emerging technologies and standards are being debated.
The next wave of wireless technologies will provide over 100 Mbps data rates using a OFDM radio interface, multiple antenna techniques and an IPbased distributed network architecture. A thorough understanding of the fundamental changes introduced by these emerging technologies, as well as
the resulting opportunities and challenges, is a must for wireless professionals.

About the Curriculum

Award Solutions Emerging Trends curriculum focuses on technologies on


the horizon. The focus of this curriculum is on enabling technologies for
wireless multimedia services. In addition, recent standardization, research
and industry activities are addressed.

Self-paced eLearning Courses


Overview of OFDM
Multiple Antenna Techniques
Wi-Fi Overview

Instructor Led Courses

*WiFi Technical Overview *NEW

Multiple Antenna Techniques eLearning Course

2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

41

Overview of OFDM

eLearning | Average Duration: 2 Hours | Course Number: TRND103


Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) is a transmission technique used to achieve very high data rates. OFDM is the technology of choice for all
major wireless systems including Wireless LAN 802.11, WiMAX 802.16, digital audio/video broadcast systems such as Digital Video Broadcast Handheld
(DVB-H), Media FLO, and the air interface evolution of 3G Wireless systems based on 3GPP and 3GPP2. OFDM facilitates higher data rates over a wireless
medium, which is very exciting to wireless operators who are eager to deploy multimedia rich Internet content over a wireless medium with seamless access
anywhere, anytime. This course describes key OFDM concepts and terminology. It explains the challenges of radio propagation and describes how OFDM
overcomes these challenges to offer high data rates in a spectrally efficient manner, and steps through the key OFDM operations in an end-to-end transmission.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This is a technical course, primarily intended for those in system design,


system integration and test, systems engineering, network engineering,
operations, and support.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Walk through the evolution of radio technologies
Describe the evolution and applications of OFDM
List the key attributes of OFDM and understand the frequency
domain orthogonality
Define various terms used in OFDM-based systems
Describe the challenges of radio propagation and how OFDM
overcome these challenges
Describe the key operation of cyclic prefix, FFT and IFFT
List the basic transmitter and receiver components in an OFDM
system
Step through the typical operations of an end-to-end data
transmission in an OFDM-based system

1. Introduction
1.1. Evolution of radio technologies
1.2. Concepts of FDMA, TDMA, CDMA
1.3. Need for OFDM for high data rates

6. End-to-End Transmission
6.1. Transmitter and receiver
components
6.2. OFDM operations

2. Principles of OFDM
2.1. Key attributes of OFDM
2.2. Frequency domain orthogonality
2.3. Time and frequency domain views

3. OFDM Basics
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Carrier and subcarrier


Modulation and OFDM symbol
Subcarrier spacing
Guard period and cyclic prefix

7. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

4. Radio Propagation
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

Multipath and doppler shift


Inter Symbol Interference (ISI)
Guard Time
Inter Carrier Interference (ICI)
Cyclic prefix and pilots

5. Fourier Transform
5.1. Motivation for using Fourier
Transforms in OFDM systems
5.2. Concept of Fourier Transform
5.3. Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)
5.4. Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)
5.5. Implementation

42

2013
2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

v3.0

Multiple Antenna Techniques

eLearning | Average Duration: 3 Hours | Course Number: TRND104


Advanced multiple antenna technologies enable emerging 4G cellular technologies to achieve superior data rates over the air interface (e.g., in excess of 100
Mbps). While 4G networks utilize an efficient multiple access technique called Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA), OFDMA on its own
cannot deliver the expected superior throughput in 4G systems. Multiple antenna techniques play a critical role in increasing spectral efficiency. This course
provides fundamental knowledge of numerous multiple antenna techniques that will be an integral part of emerging radio access standards. The antenna
basics are explained, along with typical antenna configurations in commercial cellular deployments. Major antenna techniques are covered in the course,
providing a strong foundation for advanced antenna technologies.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for those seeking a fundamental understanding of


how various multiple antenna techniques work. This includes those in a
design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering,
or verification role.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Outline key benefits and challenges of multiple antenna techniques
Provide examples of various types of multiple antenna techniques
Explain transmit and receive diversity techniques such as Space
Time Coding (STC) and antenna grouping
Contrast a switched-beam system with an adaptive beamforming
technique
Describe MIMO spatial multiplexing techniques
Discuss the implementation of SDMA
Give examples of the multiple antenna techniques defined in
emerging 4G cellular networks

Suggested Prerequisites
Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning)

Complementary Courses
Overview of OFDM (eLearning)

1. Introduction to Antenna Techniques


1.1. Antenna basics: Transmit and receive
operation, antenna parameters, and
antenna gain characteristics
1.2. Motivation for advanced antenna
techniques
1.3. Example of antenna configurations:
Omni and sectorized systems, 1
transmit and 1 receive antenna, 1
transmit and 2 receive antennas with
space and polarization diversity
1.4. Summary of multiple antenna
techniques, including advantages
and challenges

2. Transmit and Receive Diversity


Techniques
2.1. Basic techniques (space, time, and
frequency)
2.2. Advanced transmit diversity
techniques including STC,
frequency/space, and antenna
grouping/selection
2.3. Receive diversity

4. MIMO - Spatial Multiplexing


4.1. Basics of spatial multiplexing
4.2. Horizontal and vertical encoding,
single-code word and multi-code
word
4.3. MIMO transmitter and receiver
examples
4.4. Closed-loop MIMO (MIMO +
precoding)
4.5. Collaborative spatial multiplexing
4.6. Benefits and challenges of MIMOSM

5. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

3. Beamforming Techniques
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

Construction of a beam
Transmit and receive beamforming
Switched-beam system
Adaptive beamforming system
Benefits and challenges of
beamforming

+1.972.664.0727
2013
2013 Award
Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

v2.0

43

Wi-Fi Overview

eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | FUND106


Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) is becoming as ubiquitous as microwaves in enterprises, home offices and hotspots. This eLearning course offers a quick and concise
overview of the Wi-Fi network and architecture. It begins with an overview of the current landscape of wireless networks, describing where Wi-Fi fits. The WiFi network architecture and its components are introduced to provide an end-to-end view of the Wi-Fi network along with various applications of the
technology, different flavors of Wi-Fi technologies and the landscape of Wi-Fi related technologies. The end-to-end view of a Wi-Fi connection setup and traffic
flow is also explored.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is an overview of Wi-Fi and designed for a broad audience,


including customer support, operations, sales/marketing, product and
project management and those in engineering who want a broad overview
of Wi-Fi.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Describe Wi-Fis place in the landscape of wireless networks
Sketch the Wi-Fi network architecture and its interfaces
List key applications on Wi-Fi such as local area wireless
connectivity, VPN, VoIP, and FMC
List and define various 802.11 based air interface Wi-Fi
technologies
Sketch how Wi-Fi fits into existing enterprise networks
Identify the options for Wi-Fi deployment

Suggested Prerequisites
Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)

1. Motivation and Overview


1.1. History of Wi-Fi and 802.11
1.2. Current state of wireless networks
1.3. Drivers for Wi-Fi networks

Put It All Together


Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

2. Wi-Fi Architecture
2.1. Wi-Fi Network architecture and
topology
2.2. Deployment scenarios (enterprise,
hotspot, home office)
3. Wi-Fi Technology Overview and

standards

3.1. Technology overview


3.2. Family of 802.11 and evolution from
802.11b to 802.11n
3.3. Overview of 802.11i, 802.11e and
802.11s

4. End to End Connection Setup

4.1. Walk through of connection setup


4.2. End-to-end flow

5. Wi-Fi Applications

5.1. Internet access


5.2. Enterprise/VPN access
5.3. Voice over Wi-Fi

6. Security over Wi-Fi

6.1. Security and authentication


6.2. WEP and AES
6.3. Application layer security

7. Wi-Fi Deployment Scenarios


7.1. Coverage and capacity
7.2. Unlicensed bands

44

2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com


www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

v2.0

Wi-Fi Technical Overview

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: TRND204


The enormous popularity of Wi-Fi has led to increasing demands for enhancing the data rate and other features in these wireless networks. Wi-Fi networks have
rivaled cellular networks in terms of growth and popularity. There is much debate in the industry whether Wi-Fi competes with or complements 3G/4G networks.
Wi-Fi technology is based on evolving 802.11 set of standards. This course covers the landscape of Wi-Fi standards, details of air Interface, network operations
and deployment strategies. The course also deals with all major aspects of Wi-Fi including the possible interaction with cellular networks and future trends from
a technology and application perspective.

Intended Audience
This course is intended for individuals looking to gain an understanding of
Wi-Fi and its evolutions from the technical and usage perspectives.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Understand the link between Wi-Fi and IEEE 802.11 standards


List the RF bands relevant for Wi-Fi
Explain the different deployment scenarios for Wi-Fi
Describe the underlying technologies of Wi-Fi such as OFDM and
MIMO
Understand the basics of the MAC in Wi-Fi and also be able to
explain features such as frame aggregation, block ACK, TXOP, RIFS
and the reverse direction protocol
Explain the security features and protection mechanisms relevant
for Wi-Fi deployments
Understand how Wi-Fi networks are gearing up for working with
cellular networks
Explain the future technology and application trends in Wi-Fi

Suggested Prerequisites
Overview of OFDM (eLearning)

Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. Evolution of Wi-Fi and IEEE 802.11
standards
1.2. Types of Wi-Fi networks
1.3. Typical deployments
1.4. Future trends in Wi-Fi

2. Wi-Fi (802.11n) Air Interface


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.

Physical layer evolution


Use of OFDM in Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi channels and bandwidths
Multiple antenna techniques in Wi-Fi
MAC principles in Wi-Fi
Advanced MAC features

3. Wi-Fi Security
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

Security requirements in Wi-Fi


Evolution of security in Wi-Fi
WPA and WPA2
Wireless intrusion threats
Wireless protected setup

4. Wi-Fi QoS
4.1. QoS features in Wi-Fi
4.2. WMM certification
4.3. Voice over Wi-Fi

5. Wi-Fi Network Operations


5.1. Beacons and their role
5.2. Scanning and network discovery
5.3. Power save mechanisms
2013Award
Award
Solutions,
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

2013
Solutions,
Inc.Inc.www.awardsolutions.com

6. Wi-Fi Deployment
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

Hotspot deployments
Enterprise deployments
Wi-Fi /cellular integration
Wi-Fi offloading for data and/or
voice
6.5. Wi-Fi Passpoint
Certification/Hotspot 2.0

7. 802.11 Extensions
7.1. Roaming/fast BSS transition
802.11r
7.2. Radio resource management
802.11k
7.3. Wi-Fi network management
802.11v
7.4. Management frame protection
802.11w
7.5. External networks 802.11u

8. Future of Wi-Fi Technologies


8.1. 802.11ac and its features band of
operation, peak data rates, MUMIMO operation, usage scenarios
8.2. 802.11ad and its features band of
operations, bandwidth, peak data
rates, beamforming, and usage
scenarios

v1.0

45

46

2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

IP Convergence & IMS


One of the key changes in communication networks is an evolution toward All-IP-based core networks. In these networks, both voice and data services
are provided by one consolidated network. Operators will be able to provide voice, video and data services with a single unified core network.
There are many benefits to converged IP networks. For operators, these integrated networks offer savings in operating costs. They also enable operators
to offer integrated multimedia services combining voice and data services. As every communication network moves to IP-based networks, seamless
mobility can be achieved by moving to All-IP-based networks.

About the Curriculum

Award Solutions IP Convergence & IMS curriculum focuses on advanced


technologies by providing a suite of courses to help prepare individuals
for designing, deploying and optimizing tomorrows networks. Our courses
provide end-to-end coverage of the technologies and explain how they are
deployed in different wireless networks. It becomes useful for those who
need to understand how to deploy and sell new services over the Internet.

Self-paced eLearning Courses

Welcome to IP Networking
IP Convergence Overview
Overview of MPLS
Overview of IMS
Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview
IP Quality of Service (QoS)
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
Ethernet Backhaul Overview
IP Basics
IP Routing
QoS in IP Networks
TCP and Transport Layer Protocols
Ethernet Basics
Ethernet VLANs
Ethernet Bridging
Interconnecting IP Networks
Welcome to IPv6

Instructor Led Courses

IP Convergence Essentials
Ethernet Backhaul Essentials
Exploring IPv6
Exploring MPLS
Exploring IMS (R8)
*Exploring SIP, VoIP and IP Convergence with IMS *NEW
Exploring Ethernet Backhaul
Voice and Video over IP Protocols and Technologies

Exploring IMS (R8) Instructor Led Course

Instructor Led Courses (continued)

Exploring IP Routing and Ethernet Bridging


Ethernet Backhaul Planning
*SIP and Diameter for IMS/VoLTE *NEW
*Exploring Cloud Computing Service Models *NEW
*Exploring Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS) *NEW
*Exploring the Service Oriented Architecture (SOA) *NEW

2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

47

Welcome to IP Networking

eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: IPC_103


As the wireless industry transitions to 3G and 4G wireless networks supporting higher rate packet data services, a solid understanding of IP networking is
essential. IP is to data transfer as a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of IPv4 and IPv6 networking along with use of VLANs is a
must for all wireless professionals. Starting with an introduction to IP networking services such as the web, email and VPN to illustrate the value and ubiquity
of IP networks, the course then describes the IP network architecture, the functions provided by various components and the role of key protocols. This course
provides an introduction to IPv6 features, its interworking with IPv4, and techniques to migrate to IPv6 and concludes with a discussion of how
GPRS/UMTS/LTE and 1x/1xEV networks take advantage of IP networks when providing mobile web access.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for those seeking an introduction to IP Networking


and how it is used in wireless networks.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List the applications that use IP networks


Sketch the Internet architecture
Distinguish between Internet, intranet, extranet and IP networks
List the key characteristics of IP networks and different types of IP
addresses
Identify the limitations of IPv4, and key features and benefits of IPv6
Name the key protocols used in IP networks
Explain how IP packets are routed from point A to point B
Describe security in IP networks
Describe the use of IP networking in 3G/4G wireless networks

Complementary Courses
Wireless Internet - From IP to EDGE & UMTS/HSPA+ (Instructor Led)

1. Applications in IP Networks
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.

2. IP Network Architecture
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

Architecture of the Internet


WANs, MANs, LANs and VLANs
Functions of IP router
IP protocol layers

5. Internet Security
5.1. Security threats
5.2. Key security technologies: IPSec,
SSL
5.3. Examples of applications

6. Wireless IP Networks
6.1. IP networks with mobile wireless
access
6.2. Architecture of 1x and
GPRS/UMTS/LTE
6.3. End-to-end scenario

7. Summary

3. Key Characteristics of IP
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

IP addressing
Different versions of IP
Limitations of IPv4
Key features and benefits of IPv6
Migrating from IPv4 to IPv6

Put It All Together


Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

4. IP Networking Protocols and Their


Roles
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

48

Email
Web browsing
IP telephony
Internet, Intranet, Extranet
VPN
Value of using IP

DHCP, DNS, ARP, PPP


RIP, OSPF, BGP
Domain Name System (DNS)
IP forwarding
TCP and UDP

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v3.0

IP Convergence Overview

eLearning | Average Duration: 4 hours | Course Number: IPC_104


As wireless and wireline networks mature, data usage increases, and network infrastructure and services become more IP-centric, more personnel will be
responsible for managing and working with IP-centric networks. A solid understanding of IP and data communications will be essential for personnel at all
levels to be effective in a data-oriented environment. This course provides the background and concepts to understand the motivations of networks
converging toward IP. It discusses the challenges of transport of media (voice and video) using IP (VoIP) as the transport service in telecommunication
networks. It presents the unique flavor of this challenge from the perspective of the three basic types of network for the telecommunications world access
networks, core networks, and services network.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for those seeking a high level understanding of the
convergence toward IP-centric networks. This includes those in sales,
marketing, project management, technical management, and executive
management.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List the key motivations for voice and video over IP


Define IP convergence
Describe the use of IP as transport in access networks
Discuss the use of IP as transport in core networks and the
associated major technologies
Outline the use of IP as transport in services networks and the
associated major technologies
Explain the possible evolution paths of networks today

1. State of the Industry

1.1. Defining IP convergence


1.2. Motivations for convergence
1.2.1. Quad play
1.2.2. OPEX
1.2.3. Other converged services
1.3. What are voice and video over IP?
1.4. Where is the industry going?
1.5. Markets and regulatory environment
1.6. Discontinuities?
1.7. Common approaches in networks

2. IP Convergence in Access Networks


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

Scope of the convergence


Residential cable, DSL, FTTH
Enterprise PBX, host-based
Wireless UMTS, 1xEV-DO, WiMAX
Challenges and scenarios

4.3. Supporting
technologies/protocols
4.3.1. SIP
4.3.2. H.323
4.3.3. Megaco/H.248
4.4. Deployment and challenges

5. Looking Ahead
5.1. Time frames
5.2. Looking forward

6. Summary
Put It All Together
Exercise 1

3. IP Convergence in Core Networks


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

The carrier network challenge


QoS
RTP and RTCP
PSTN and SS7 interworking

4. IP Convergence in Services Networks


4.1. The service network challenge
4.2. The service network competitors
4.2.1. IMS/MMD
4.2.2. P2P (Skype, MS LCS, etc.)

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v2.0

49

Overview of MPLS

eLearning | Average Duration: 3.5 hours | Course Number: IPC_106


As the services and applications of the Internet continue to expand, the Internet backbone must evolve to support them. The key areas of emphasis are
routing, QoS, addressing, efficiency and security. Multi Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) is designed to make the Internet fast, scalable and manageable, and
capable of carrying heavy traffic, supporting QoS and new routing architectures. This course presents a technical overview of MPLS including a detailed
discussion on the architecture of MPLS, the components of the MPLS network and the supporting protocols required for MPLS. Operational issues of MPLS
and issues related to interworking MPLS with ATM are also explored. The course ends with a discussion of G-MPLS, which is the evolution of MPLS.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of MPLS, its


features and capabilities.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Describe the motivation behind MPLS


State the role of MPLS in the convergence of networks
List key applications of MPLS
Compare and contrast the routing techniques of ATM and MPLS
Sketch the architecture of MPLS
Describe the important components and operations of MPLS
Describe how MPLS is used to set up layer 3 and layer 2 VPNs
Explain the role of MPLS in traffic engineering
Identify the next steps for MPLS including G-MPLS

1. Prologue
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.

Introduction to MPLS
Motivation for MPLS
IP forwarding techniques
MPLS forwarding techniques

2. Current state of IP networks


2.1. Limitations of IP networks
2.2. IP over ATM solutions

3. Why MPLS?
3.1. Advantages of MPLS
3.2. New applications

4. MPLS Networks
4.1. MPLS domain
4.2. Label edge router
4.3. Label switch router

5. MPLS Terminology
5.1. Label Switched Paths (LSP)
5.2. Forward Equivalence Class (FEC)
5.3. Structure of a label

6. Packet Forwarding Along LSPs


6.1. Label Forwarding Information Base
(LFIB)
6.2. Packet forwarding along LSPs
6.3. Label stacking

7. LSP Setup Process

8. MPLS Protocols
8.1. New protocols
8.2. Example of protocol use

9. MPLS and Virtual Private Networks


9.1. VPNs support in MPLS
9.2. Layer 3 and Layer 2 VPNs
establishment in MPLS
9.3. Label stacking and VPNs
9.4. MPLS based L2 VPN solutions

10. MPLS and Traffic Engineering


10.1. Introduction to traffic engineering
10.2. MPLS traffic engineering
procedures

11. Deployment
11.1. Current deployments
11.2. Next steps

12. Evolution of MPLS


12.1. New applications
12.2. Generalized MPLS (G-MPLS)

13. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

7.1. Hop-by-hop routed LSPs


7.2. Explicit routed LSPs

50

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v3.0

Overview of IMS

eLearning | Average Duration: 2.5 hours | Course Number: IPC_107


The Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) is a significant core network evolution that uses common Internet-based protocols to provide global,
access-independent and standard-based IP connectivity and service control. The IMS architecture is a key enabler of various types of multimedia services to
end-users. IMS helps provide a network that fulfills the promise of all-IP networks, allowing a combination of real-time and non- real-time services to be
delivered to a single device. IMS is access network independent and, hence, promotes interoperability between wireline, cellular, WLAN, CATV, FTTH and other
types of access networks. This course explores the various concepts used in the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) including architecture, network components
and interfaces. Please note that this course does not cover any specific access technology.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for those seeking a high level understanding of the
IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). This includes those in sales and
marketing, product planning, product management, design, integration,
verification and deployment.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
List the driving forces, requirements and goals of the IP Multimedia
Subsystem (IMS)
Identify the building blocks used to construct the IMS
Describe the functions of the IMS architecture that support
multimedia functions
Explain the roles of SIP, MEGACO, DIAMETER, and the enabling
technologies used in the architecture
Describe how functions such as mobility, and call processing are
carried out in the new architecture
Explain end-to-end service establishment flows in the IMS
architecture
Describe scenarios that illustrate interworking with the PSTN

Suggested Prerequisites
IP Convergence Overview (eLearning)

1. Setting the Stage


1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.

Trends for telephony services


Evolution of mobile networks
Define IMS
Benefits and challenges of IMS
IMS service examples

2. IMS Architecture
2.1. Origin of IMS
2.2. Architecture reference models
2.3. Components and functions

3. Signaling and Transport


3.1. IMS reference points
3.2. Role of SIP, DIAMETER and
H.248/Megaco
3.3. Basics of voice transmission
3.4. QoS management in IMS
3.5. RTP and RTCP

5. Interworking
5.1. Interoperability between PSTN
and IMS
5.2. Compare PSTN call establishment
with IMS to IMS call
5.3. Establishing a call with the PSTN
5.4. Messages required for a call to
the PSTN

6. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

4. IMS Scenarios
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

IMS registration
IMS session setup
Role of application servers
Examples

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v3.0

51

Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview


eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: IPC_108

Quad Play (Voice, Video, Data, and Wireless) is the name for the latest evolution in the communications industry. Since more people will be responsible for
operating, maintaining and working with IP-centric networks, this course provides the essential knowledge on Voice and Video services using IP (VVoIP) in
modern communications networks. We begin the course with a look at the motivation for change and the network architectures of today and tomorrow. We
move on to provide an end-to-end view of the call setups that establish VVoIP networks, followed by a look at IPTV, and a high-level examination of the
underlying protocols and technologies used in the devices, the edge (access) networks, and the core networks that provide appropriate Quality of Service
(QoS). The course offers exercises designed to reinforce key objectives and make participant comfortable with the concepts.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for those seeking a high-level but comprehensive


understanding of VVoIP in both its voice and video renditions. The intended
audience includes those in sales, marketing, product and strategic
planning, product documentation, product management, system design
and integration, and application verification and deployments. The course
is also good preparation for more advanced courses in the underlying
subjects.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Describe the motivation behind VVoIP


Provide an overview of VVoIP
Explain how VVoIP calls are set up
Introduce IPTV
Describe how Quality of Service (QoS) can be implemented
Illustrate video traffic operations
Explain the interworking of VVoIP networks with other types of
networks
Discuss VVoIP deployments

1. Introduction
1.1. Motivation for VVoIP
1.2. Characteristics of VVoIP
1.3. Network architecture
1.3.1. Today Tomorrow
1.3.2. PSTN Managed packets
1.4. Key requirements
1.5. Challenges of VVoIP and
convergence

2. Setting up a Call
2.1. Architecture of a SIP network
2.2. Voice over IP call flow
2.2.1. Authentication
2.2.2. QoS negotiation
2.2.3. Monitoring traffic flow
2.3. Video over IP call flow
2.4. SIP and SDP basics
2.5. Comparison of SIP and H.323

3. IPTV

5. Traffic Operations
5.1. Device traffic operations
5.2. Media encoding
5.3. Media transport

6. Interworking with Other Networks


6.1. Architecture and media gateways
6.2. SIGTRAN and SCTP
6.3. End-to-end call set up with the
PSTN

7. Deployment Considerations
7.1. Dimensioning
7.2. Key performance indicators
7.3. Security

8. Summary
Put it all Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

3.1. The changing TV service model


3.2. IPTV networks and protocols

4. QoS Requirements and Solutions


4.1. QoS challenges
4.2. Possible solutions

52

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v3.0

IP Quality of Service (QoS)

eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: IPC_109


The Internet is coming to a new age where various applications have their own QoS requirements, and one size definitely does not fit all. This course
introduces the concept of QoS and discusses the current limitations within the Internet. The new services requirements driving QoS in the Internet are
presented. The two basic techniques used for QoS - Integrated Services and Differentiated Services - are presented. The discussion includes the benefits and
limitations of the Integrated Services and the Differentiated Services approaches to QoS. While IntServ and DiffServ are the approaches, service providers
need an infrastructure to deploy QoS-based applications rapidly. This course describes the policy-based QoS architecture which supports the infrastructure for
delivering QoS based applications. Finally, emerging trends in IP QoS are introduced.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of the IP Quality of


Service architectures in the Internet.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Determine the limitations of the best effort approach to QoS


Describe the need for QoS with respect to new applications
Explain how QoS requirements are communicated
Define policy-based architecture
Explain the benefits and limitations of the Integrated Services
approach to QoS
Explain the benefits and limitations of the Differentiated Services
approach to QoS
Describe the protocols that are used for each of the QoS
approaches
Identify emerging trends in IP QoS

1. Motivation for Quality of Service (QoS)


1.1. Definition of Quality of Service
1.2. Service examples
1.3. QoS parameters

2. QoS in todays Internet


2.1. Current QoS mechanisms
2.2. Limitations of the current QoS
mechanisms

3. QoS Requirements
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

7. Emerging Trends in QoS


7.1. Hybrid architectures
7.2. Automated QoS management
7.3. Bandwidth brokers

8. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

Requirements of QoS on the Internet


Service Level Agreements (SLAs)
Challenges for deploying IP QoS
Policy based QoS architecture

4. QoS Models
4.1. Application approach vs. aggregated
approach
4.2. Introduction to IP QoS models

5. Integrated Services Approach (IntServ)


5.1. Integrated Service approach
5.2. Limitations of the Integrated Services
approach
5.3. ReSerVation Protocol (RSVP)

6. Differentiated Services Approach


(DiffServ)
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.

Differentiated services approach


DiffServ protocol
DiffServ implementation
Traffic management functions
Issues with DiffServ

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v2.0

53

Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)

eLearning | Average Duration: 2 hours | Course Number: IPC_110


The Internet has become the single network that provides universal connectivity around the world. One of the new and exciting uses of the Internet is to
provide voice and multimedia services. A protocol must exist to establish these voice and multimedia calls. This course discusses the Session Initiation
Protocol (SIP). SIP was developed by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) to establish voice and multimedia calls through the Internet. SIP is designed to
establish voice calls as well as any connection between two or more parties. This connection can vary from simple Instant Messaging to more complex
multimedia sessions. The messaging and architecture of SIP are explained in detail including the key contents of the messages and the key components of
the architecture. The concepts of SIP are solidified with the presentation of a series of multimedia service establishment examples.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of SIP, its features
and capabilities.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the motivation behind a consolidated voice and data
network
Describe the challenges of a consolidated network
Define the term softswitch and its usage
Describe how SIP will be used to establish everything from voice
calls to multimedia sessions
Identify components in the SIP architecture and their function in the
converged network
State the use and flexibility of the Session Description Protocol
Explain how SIP is being extended to provide additional capabilities

Suggested Prerequisites
Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)

1. Motivation for Voice over IP networks


1.1. Motivation for consolidating voice
and data
1.2. Benefits of a consolidated network
1.3. Challenges of a consolidated
network

2. Key Features of SIP


2.1. Introduction to SIP
2.2. Key characteristics and features of
SIP

7. Looking Ahead
7.1. Future of SIP

8. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

3. SIP Messaging
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Basic session establishment


Session Description Protocol
Addressing
Registration

4. SIP Architecture
4.1. Functions and capabilities of SIP
servers
4.2. Role of User Agent
4.3. Proxy and redirect servers
4.4. Function of a softswitch

5. Examples of session establishment


5.1. Establishment of a video call via LAN
5.2. Establishment of a voice call via ITSP

6. SIP Challenge
6.1. Extensions
6.2. Firewall traversal

54

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v3.0

Ethernet Backhaul Overview

eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: IPC_122


Emerging 3G and 4G networks reflect two key fundamental changes in wireless networks. The first change is the trend toward an all IP network and the
second change is a more efficient radio interface resulting in a huge growth in the volume of traffic supported by the air interface. Traditional backhaul using
T1/E1 leased lines is no longer economical so new backhaul solutions are being deployed. This course describes the key issues leading to the need for new
backhaul solutions and provides an overview of the various backhaul solutions and related technologies. It introduces the backhaul network architecture and
reviews technologies such as ATM, DSL, Bonded T1/E1, DOCSIS, Microwave Radio, PON, Carrier Ethernet, MPLS/MPLS-TP and PBB-TE. A backhaul capacity
planning and technology migration scenario is presented, and the course ends with an exercise to test the students comprehension of the topics covered.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is suitable for those looking for a high level conceptual
overview of IP/Ethernet backhaul networks and an introduction to
associated technologies.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List the requirements for 3G/4G backhaul


Describe the challenges for 3G/4G backhaul
Differentiate between the access and aggregation networks
Identify the networking options most likely deployed for Ethernet
Backhaul (EBH)
Discuss the role of various technologies in backhaul networks
Explain benefits of Carrier Ethernet and list various services
provided for backhaul
List the key issues related to migrating to an Ethernet-based
backhaul network
Identify tools and techniques used to seamlessly migrate to EBH
Compare different backhaul facilities and explain the pros and cons
of the available solutions
Explain where faults in the EBH network may occur, and how these
faults are detected and isolated
Identify the key challenges in sizing backhaul capacity links
Sketch possible migration path from a T1/E1 based backhaul
solution to tomorrows IP/Carrier Ethernet based backhaul solution

1. The Big Picture


1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.

What is Backhaul
Motivation for EBH
Backhaul requirements
Backhaul challenges

2. Backhaul Options
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

SONET transport
Microwave transport
Ethernet transport
Other transport

3. Carrier Ethernet (CE)


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

What is it?
CE service types
CE connection granularity
Negotiating a CE service
EBH backhaul design

4. Key EBH Issues


4.1. Migration: Todays BH to tomorrows
BH
4.2. Joint backhaul of 2G, 3G, and 4G
traffic
4.3. Emerging all-IP environment
4.4. Timing and synchronization
4.5. EBH operations and management

6. Deploying and Operating an EBH


Network
6.1. Deployment testing (RFC2544;
Y.1731, CFM)
6.2. Fault detection and recovery
6.3. Performance monitoring

7. EBH Capacity Planning


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.

Capacity planning process


Nature of data traffic
Forecasting subscriber mixes
Sizing EBH links

8. Summary
Putting it All Together
Exercise to assess the knowledge of the
participant based on the objectives of the
course

5. EBH Growing Pains


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

Market evolution
Bonding techniques
CE transport options
TDM-based to Ethernet-based
backhaul

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.0

55

IP Basics

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_114


As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP, a solid
understanding of IP and its role in networking is essential. IP is to data transfer as what a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of
IPv4 and IPv6 networking along with use of VLANs is a must for all telecom professionals. A solid foundation in IP has become a basic job requirement in the
carrier world. Starting with a brief history, the course provides a focused basic level introduction to the fundamentals of IP technology. It is a modular
introductory course only on IP basics as part of the overall eLearning IP fundamentals curriculum.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for those seeking a basic level introduction to the
Internet Protocol (IP).

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

56

1.
2.
3.
4.

IP Address
IP Subnets
IP Header
Multicast and Broadcast

Describe the purpose and structure of an IP address


Describe network prefix
Explain the purpose of CIDR Prefix
Explain the purpose of Subnet Mask
Describe IP Subnets
Explain the IP header and its key fields
Describe broadcasting in IP networks
Describe multicasting in IP networks

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.0

IP Routing

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_113


As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP, a solid
understanding of IP and its role in networking is essential. IP is to data transfer as a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of IPv4 and
IPv6 networking along with use of routing is a must for all telecom professionals. A solid foundation in IP and routing has become a basic job requirement in
the carrier world. Understanding of IP routing protocols is an important part of building this foundation. Starting with a basic definition, the course provides a
focused base level introduction to the fundamentals of IP routing and associated protocols like OSPF, BGP, and VRRP. It is a modular introductory course only
on IP routing as part of the overall eLearning IP fundamentals curriculum.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for those seeking a basic level introduction to IP


routing and the common associated protocols.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Define the differences between IP routing and forwarding
Distinguish between Interior Gateway Protocols and Exterior
Gateway Protocols and give examples of each
Explain Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) and how it is used
List the main types of Link State Advertisements in OSPF
Describe Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) and how it is used
Show how route reflectors simplify network configuration and
reduce routing overhead
Explain how PING can be used to verify end-to-end connectivity in an
IP Network
Describe how Traceroute can be used to track down routing errors
in a network

1. What is IP routing?
1.1. IP routing basics
1.2. Routing and forwarding
1.3. Routing protocols

2. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)


2.1. OSPF basics
2.2. A closer look at OSPF

3. Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)


3.1. BGP basics
3.2. A closer look at BGP
3.3. Scaling BGP

4. Redundancy Protocols
4.1. Introduction
4.2. VRRP
4.3. GLBP

5. Debugging Tools and Utilities


5.1. PING
5.2. Traceroute

6. Summary

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.0

57

QoS in IP Networks

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_115


As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP, a solid
understanding of IP and its role in networking is essential. IP is to data transfer as what a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of
IPv4 and IPv6 networking along with the use of IP for Quality of Service (QoS) is a must for all telecom professionals. A solid foundation in IP and QoS has
become a basic job requirement in the carrier world. Various applications have their own QoS requirements in converged networks, and one size definitely
does not fit all. This course introduces the concept of QoS. The two basic techniques used for QoS - Integrated Services and Differentiated Services - are
presented. While IntServ and DiffServ are the approaches, service providers need an infrastructure to deploy QoS-based applications rapidly. This is a modular
introductory course on IP QoS basics as part of the overall eLearning IP fundamentals curriculum.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of the IP Quality of


Service architectures.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Explore the Motivations for QoS in an IP network


Describe the different QoS parameters
Define the QoS process and Service Level Agreements
Explain the Policy based QoS architecture
Differentiate the IP QoS models: IntServ and DiffServ
Explain in detail how the DiffServ model is implemented
Explain how QoS is achieved in the LTE network

1. Motivation for Quality of Service


1.1. Definition of Quality of Service
1.2. QoS parameters
1.3. Service examples

2. QoS Requirements
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

Requirements of QoS
QoS process
Service Level Agreement (SLA)
Policy based QoS architecture

3. QoS Models
3.1. Introduction to IP QoS models
3.2. Integrated Services (IntServ)
3.3. Differentiated Services (DiffServ)

4. DiffServ
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

Differentiated services approach


DiffServ protocol
DSCP
Traffic enforcement functions
DiffServ support in Ethernet and
MPLS
4.6. QoS in LTE network

58

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.0

TCP and Transport Layer Protocols

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_117


As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP, a solid
understanding of IP and its role in networking is essential. IP is to data transfer as what a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of
IPv4 and IPv6 networking along with use of IP based transport protocols is a must for all telecom professionals. A solid foundation in IP has become a basic
job requirement in the carrier world. Understanding of TCP and other IP based transport layer protocols is an important part of building this foundation.
Starting with a basic definition, the course provides a focused basic level introduction to the fundamentals of IP based transport layer protocols like TCP, UDP
and SCTP. It is a modular introductory course only on IP basics as part of the overall eLearning IP fundamentals curriculum.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for those seeking a basic level introduction to the
IP-based transport layer protocols - TCP, UDP and SCTP.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Overview of the Transport Layer


User Datagram Protocol
Transmission Control Protocol
Stream Control Transport Protocol
Summary

Explain the key transport layer functions and the concept of ports
Describe User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and Transmission Control
Protocol (TCP)
Explain how TCP provides reliable communication over IP and
achieves optimal transmission
Define the special requirements for carrying telecom signaling over
IP networks
List the key functions of Stream Control Transmission Protocol
(SCTP)

2013
Award Solutions,
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
+1.972.664.0727
2013 Award
Solutions,
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
+1.972.664.0727

v1.0

59

Ethernet Basics

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_119


As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP networks, a
solid understanding of Ethernet and its role in networking is essential. Ethernet is native to IP and has been adopted in various forms by the communication
industry. A solid foundation in IP and Ethernet has become a basic job requirement in the industry. Starting with a brief history, the course provides a focused
basic level introduction to the fundamentals of Ethernet technology. It is a modular introductory course only on Ethernet basics as part of the overall eLearning
IP fundamentals curriculum.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for those seeking a basic level introduction to


Ethernet technology.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

60

Define Ethernet
Summarize the key variations of the Ethernet family of standards
Discuss Ethernet addressing and Frame Structure
Discuss Ethernet services offered by Carriers

1. Ethernet Defined
2. Ethernet Standards
3. Ethernet Addressing and Frame
Structure
4. Carrier Ethernet
5. Summary

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.0

Ethernet VLANs

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_118


As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP networks, a
solid understanding of Ethernet and its role in networking is essential. Ethernet is native to IP and has been adopted in various forms by the telecom industry
as the Layer 1 and Layer 2 of choice. VLANs are used extensively in the end-to-end IP network and a solid foundation in IP and Ethernet has become a basic
job requirement for the carrier world. Starting with a brief history, the course provides a focused basic level introduction to the fundamentals of Ethernet VLAN
technology. It is a modular introductory course only on Ethernet VLAN basics as part of the overall eLearning IP fundamentals curriculum. The course includes
a pre-test and a post-test.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for those seeking a basic level introduction to


Ethernet Bridging.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Define Ethernet VLANs
Identify Ethernet VLAN applications and benefits
Summarize the key variations of the Ethernet family of standards to
support VLANs
Identify the key types of Ethernet VLANs
Describe VLAN Trunks and their purpose

1.
2.
3.
4.

Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs)


VLAN Application and Benefits
Default VLAN
Multiswitch VLANs: Trunks and
Tagging
5. Summary

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.0

61

Ethernet Bridging

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_116


As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP networks, a
solid understanding of Ethernet and its role in networking is essential. Ethernet is native to IP and has been adopted in various forms by the telecom industry
as the Layer 1 and Layer 2 technology of choice. Ethernet bridging and associated capabilities are used extensively in the end-to-end IP network and a solid
foundation in IP and Ethernet has become a basic job requirement in the carrier world. Starting with a brief history, the course provides a focused basic level
introduction to the fundamentals of Ethernet Bridging as a key capability of Ethernet based nodes. It is a modular introductory course only on Ethernet
Bridging basics as part of the overall eLearning IP fundamentals curriculum.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for those seeking a basic level introduction to


Ethernet Bridging.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Introduce Ethernet Bridges and explain how they operate
Introduce Ethernet Switches and explain how they differ from
Ethernet Bridges
Discuss Spanning Tree Protocol and its variations
Introduce the concept of Multilayer Switching
Discuss the use of Link Aggregation Group in Ethernet networks

1. Ethernet Bridge

1.1. Definition
1.2. History
1.3. Learning Bridge

2. Ethernet Switch
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

Definition
History
Ethernet Switching
Full Duplex operation

3. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)


3.1. Function
3.2. Operation
3.3. Variants

4. Multilayer Switch (MLS)


4.1. Definition
4.2. Function

5. Link Aggregation Group


5.1. Definition
5.2. Uses

6. Summary

62

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.0

Interconnecting in IP Networks

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_120


As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP networks, a solid
understanding of IP and its role in inter-networking is essential. IP is to data transfer as a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of IPv4 and
IPv6 networking along with their use for inter-networking is a must for all telecom professionals. A solid foundation in IP has become a basic job requirement in carrier
networks. As the services and applications of wireless networks continue to expand, the backbone must evolve to support them. Multi Protocol Label Switching (MPLS)
is designed to make the backbone fast, scalable and manageable, and capable of carrying heavy traffic, supporting QoS. This course presents a technical overview of
MPLS including a discussion on the architecture of MPLS, the components of the MPLS network and the supporting protocols required for MPLS. It is a modular
introductory course only on MPLS basics as part of the overall eLearning IP fundamentals curriculum.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for anyone seeking a basic level overview of the
MPLS and IP interconnecting architectures.

1. Why MPLS?

Learning Objectives

2. MPLS Networks

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


Describe the motivation behind MPLS
State the role of MPLS in the convergence of networks
List key applications of MPLS
Sketch the architecture of MPLS
Describe the important components and operations of MPLS
Describe how MPLS is used to set up layer 3 and layer 2 VPNs

1.1. Advantages of MPLS


1.2. New applications
2.1. MPLS domain
2.2. Label edge router
2.3. Label switch router

3. MPLS Terminology
3.1. Label Switched Paths (LSP)
3.2. Forward Equivalence Class (FEC)
3.3. Structure of a label

4. Packet Forwarding Along LSPs


4.1. Label Forwarding Information Base
(LFIB)
4.2. Packet forwarding along LSPs
4.3. Label stacking

5. MPLS and Virtual Private Networks


5.1. VPNs support in MPLS
5.2. Layer 3 and Layer 2 VPNs
establishment in MPLS
5.3. Label stacking and VPNs
5.4. MPLS based L2 VPN solutions

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.0

63

Welcome to IPv6

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour


As the communications industry transitions to wireless, wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP networks, a solid
understanding of IP and its role in networking is essential. IP is to data transfer as a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of IPv4 and
IPv6 networking along with use of IP for QoS is a must for all telecom professionals. IPv6 was defined in 1998 but saw little adoption for over a decade. With
continued IPv4 address depletion and the migration to wireless VoIP in LTE networks, the time for widespread adoption has finally arrived. This course begins
with a look at the motivation for migrating to IPv6 and some of the benefits. The IPv6 header and addressing concepts are explained next. The 128 bit address
necessitates changes to many of the supporting protocols for IP and those are discussed next. The course concludes with a look at the various approaches to
migrating from IPv4 to IPv6 and how these are deployed in LTE networks.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for technical personnel with a grounding in IPv4


networks who are seeking an technical overview of IPv6 and related
protocols.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

64

Describe why the migration to IPv6 is finally happening


List the key benefits of IPv6
Explain key fields in the IPv6 header
Discuss how IPv6 addresses are formatted and how they are
assigned
Explain how the basic IP supporting protocols are enhanced to
support IPV6
Describe how automatic routing for IPv6 networks is enabled by
BGP and OSPF
Discuss how dual stack devices help ease the transition from IPv4
to IPv6
Understand the differences between configured and automatic
tunnels for IPv6 transition
Describe how LTE networks use IPv6 and why it is necessary

1. Motivation and Benefits


1.1. IPv4 address depletion
1.2. Limitations of NAT
1.3. Benefits of IPv6

2. IPv6 Header and Addresses


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

Header format
Address format
Address notation
Types of addresses
Address assignment

3. Supporting Protocols
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

ICMP
DNS
DHCP
OSPF
BGP

4. Transition to IPv6
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

The transition problem


Dual stack
Configured tunneling
Automatic tunneling
IPv6 in LTE

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.0

IP Convergence Essentials

Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: IPC_101


As wireless and wireline networks mature, data usage increases, and network infrastructure and services become more IP-centric, more personnel will be
responsible for managing and working with IP-centric networks. A solid understanding of IP and data communications will be essential for personnel at all
levels to be effective in a data-oriented environment. This course provides the background and concepts to understand the motivations of networks
converging towards IP. It discusses the challenges of transport of media (voice and video) using IP (VoIP) as the transport service in telecommunication
networks. It presents the unique flavor of this challenge from the perspective of the three basic types of network for the telecommunications world: Access
networks, core networks, and services networks.

Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a high level understanding of the
convergence toward IP-centric networks. This includes those in sales,
marketing, project management, technical management, and executive
management.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List the key motivations for voice and video over IP


Define IP convergence
Describe the use of IP as transport in access networks
Discuss the use of IP as transport in core networks and the
associated major technologies
Outline the use of IP as transport in services networks and the
associated major technologies
Explain the possible evolution paths of networks today

Suggested Prerequisites
Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)

Course Outline
1. Introduction to IP Convergence
1.1. Defining IP convergence
1.2. Motivations for convergence
1.2.1. Quad play
1.2.2. OPEX
1.2.3. Other converged services
1.3. What are voice and video over IP?
1.4. Where is the industry going?
1.5. Markets and regulatory environment
1.6. Discontinuities?
1.7. Common approaches in networks

2. IP and VoIP Fundamentals


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

5. Service Network Convergence


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.
5.6.

The service network challenge


NGN
IMS
IPTV
IPTN in NGN with IMS
Deployment and challenges

6. Looking Ahead
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

Timeframes
Carrier ethernet
4G wireless
Summary

Circuit-Switching vs Packet-Switching
IP characterisitics
VoIP
QoS

3. Access Networks
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Scope of the convergence


Residential cable, DSL and FTTH
Enterprise PBX and host-based
Wireless UMTS, 1xEV-DO, LTE and
WiMAX
3.5. Challenges and scenarios

4. Core Networks
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

The carrier network challenge


QoS
IPv4
IPv6
IP in ATM vs MPLS

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.0

65

Ethernet Backhaul Essentials

Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: IPC_102


Executives, directors, program and project managers as well as sales and marketing professionals involved in 3G and 4G networks can benefit from a good
understanding of the terminology as well as concepts and technologies for IP/Ethernet backhaul. Two fundamental changes result from 3G and 4G networks
having a significant impact on backhaul: Trend toward an all IP network and the huge growth in the traffic over the air interface. With T1/E1 leased lines,
backhaul is no longer economical, so new backhaul solutions are being deployed. This course provides an overview of the various backhaul solutions and
related technologies, and describes the backhaul network architecture along with reviewing technologies. A backhaul technology migration scenario is
presented, and the course ends with discussion of the impact of the new IP backhaul.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is designed for executives, directors, supervisors,


program/project managers as well as sales and marketing professionals
involved in the IP/Ethernet backhaul solutions.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List the requirements for 3G/4G backhaul


Describe the challenges for 3G/4G backhaul
Sketch the 3G/4G IP backhaul deployment architecture
Differentiate between the access and aggregation networks
Discuss the role of various technologies in backhaul networks
Explain benefits of IP/MPLS and list various services provided for
backhaul
Explain benefits of carrier Ethernet and list various services
provided for backhaul
Differentiate between L2 and L3 EBH solutions
Show details of packet encapsulations between tower and MTSO
Explain how subnets, VLANs, static routes, VRRP, BFD, MPLS all
work together to create a complete and reliable solution
Connect the LTE layer with the EBH layer

1. LTE and EBH Motivation


1.1. Motivation
1.2. End-to-end network architecture
1.3. Possible EBH solutions

2. L2 Backhaul Solution
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

L2 backhaul architecture
VLANs, subnets
Static routes
Use of MPLS in backhaul
2G, 3G and LTE paths

3. L3 Backhaul Solution
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

L3 backhaul architecture
VLANs, subnets
Static routes
Use of OSPF in backhaul
2G, 3G and LTE paths

4. IP/MPLS Technology
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

Key benefits
MPLS AToM/Pseudowire
VPWS/VPLS/H-VPLS
QoS support
Application in backhaul

5.4. QoS support


5.5. Application in backhaul

6. LTE Operations Essentials


6.1. End-to-end session setup
6.2. Signaling between eNodeB, MME
and S-GW

7. eNodeB to MTSO Packet-Flow


Exercise
7.1. Sketch packet headers and
encapsulations for L2 solution
7.2. Sketch packet headers and
encapsulations for L3 solutions

8. eNodeB to MTSO Redundancy


Exercise
8.1. Failure detection
8.2. Routing due to failures
8.3. Packet forwarding to alternate
paths

5. Metro/Carrier Ethernet Technology


and Operations
5.1. Key benefits
5.2. Circuit over Ethernet
5.3. Synchronization over Ethernet
66

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.2

Exploring IPv6

Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: IPC_202


The roots of the current Internet stretch back over twenty years to its beginnings in academic institutions. The fact that it has been able to adapt and scale to
todays global network is a testament to the solid design principles used in its creation. However, as the number of Internet nodes continues to grow and new
demands are placed on it by evolving cellular wireless networks, the current IPv4-NAT architecture no longer suffices and we must consider a transition to an
updated protocol. This course explores the IPv6 protocol, which brings not only a vast address space to address millions of billions of network nodes but also a
bag of new tricks. Streamlined and simplified, IPv6 incorporates a number of companion protocols into its core specification. This course covers these general
topics as well as the adoption of IPv6 in next generation 3GPP and 3GPP2 wireless services.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This is an introductory course and does not assume any previous
knowledge of IPv6. It is suitable for wireless professionals who want to gain
an awareness of IPv4s real limitations, the key issues with IPv6s new
capabilities, and how to transition the networks.

1. Introduction

Learning Objectives

2. IPv6 Headers

After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Discuss the different requirements of an IP network


Analyze the limitations of IPv4 networks
List the key aspects of IPv6
Sketch the IPv6 addressing architecture and the new types of IP
addresses
Describe the Plug-n-Play capabilities of IPv6
Describe wireless mobility solutions in IPv6
Identify the impact of IPv6 on related protocols
Describe the use of IPv6 in 3G/4G wireless networks

1.1. IP-based networks


1.2. Current state of IPv4
1.3. Key aspects of IPv6
2.1. Disadvantages of IPv4 header
options
2.2. Extension header
2.3. Routing header
2.4. Destination/Hop-by-hop header
2.5. QoS features

6. Interworking IPv4 and IPv6


6.1. Impact of IPv4 to IPv6 transition
6.2. Interworking IPv4 and IPv6
6.3. Deployment scenarios of IPv6

7. Wireless Mobility in IPv6


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
7.5.

Mobility management essentials


Mobile IP solution
IPv6 mobility solution
Key mobility messages
IPv6 in 3GPP and 3GPP2

3. IPv6 Addressing Architecture


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

Current IPv4 addressing limitations


Address formats of IPv6
Multicast addresses
New address category (Anycast)
Fragment header

4. Plug n Play Aspects of IPv6


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

Host configuration
Stateless auto-configuration
Neighbor discovery
Stateful auto-configuration

5. IPv6 Impact on Other Protocols


5.1. Pseudo header
5.2. DNS for IPv6
5.3. DHCPv6

2013 Award Solutions, Inc.


Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

v1.5

67

Exploring MPLS

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: IPC_203


The Internet has to evolve on many fronts with regard to routing, QoS, addressing, efficiency and security. Multi Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) belongs to
the group of technologies designed to achieve this evolution. MPLS is designed to make the Internet fast, scalable, manageable, carry multimedia traffic,
support QoS and support new routing architectures. This course is designed for those who need to understand how to deploy and manage MPLS networks.
The course consists of three parts. The first part discusses MPLS technology including MPLS concepts, terminology, and signaling protocols. Next we cover
MPLS applications such as IP-VPN, Layer 2 VPN, Pseuodowires, QoS, Traffic Engineering, and Voice over MPLS. These concepts and applications are explained
with examples.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is appropriate for technical audiences that wish to understand


the benefits of MPLS, its network architecture, options for signaling, and
the major applications that MPLS supports.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Explore the benefits and rationale for MPLS


Sketch the MPLS network architecture,
Use the MPLS terminology and explain key concepts
Describe the use of MPLS signaling protocols
List and explain the applications of MPLS
Sketch the MPLS solutions for IP-VPN and Layer 2 VPN solutions
Learn how MPLS is used to support QoS
Show how Traffic Engineering (TE) operations are executed in an
MPLS network
Sketch the redundancy solutions in MPLS networks (e.g. FRR)

1. Prologue
1.1. The big picture

2. IP Foundation for MPLS


2.1. Communications overview
2.2. IP routing and forwarding
2.3. IP in ATM vs. MPLS networks

3. Introduction to MPLS
3.1. IP routing and forwarding
3.2. MPLS label switching

8. MPLS and Traffic Engineering


8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.

Motivation for traffic engineering


Traffic engineering
Traffic engineering process
Fast re-route

9. MPLS Virtual Private Networks


9.1. Virtual Private Networks overview
9.2. L2VPN
9.3. L3VPN

4. MPLS Networks
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

MPLS domain
Network components (LER, LSR)
Label Switched Path (LSP)
Forward Equivalence Class (FEC)

5. MPLS Labels
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

MPLS label structure


MPLS label binding
MPLS label distribution
Label swapping and forwarding

6. MPLS Protocols
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

Motivation for new protocols


Label Distribution Protocol (LDP)
RSVP
BGP and MP-BGP

7. MPLS and QoS


7.1. Motivation for QoS
7.2. DiffServ in MPLS

68

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v3.9

Exploring IMS (R8)

Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course ID: IPC_204


The IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) is an access-independent service control architecture that enables multimedia services to end users via Internet-based
protocols. Expertise on IMS is essential for communication professionals to successfully develop and deploy new multimedia services that are IMS-based. This
course investigates the IMS architecture including functions of nodes, key protocols and end-to-end operations for services using IMS. Enabling technologies
and protocols such as SIP, Megaco, RTP and the use of these technologies within the IMS architecture are explored. Service continuity, interconnection, and
current policy control are discussed. (Please note that this course does not cover any specific access technology.)

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended to provide a technical overview of the IMS. It is


appropriate for all technical personnel as well as those in product
management, technical sales, planning, architecture, design, deployment
and support.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List the motivation, benefits and challenges associated with IMS


Sketch IMS network architecture
List the functions of the key components in IMS
Explain functions of key protocols such as SIP, Megaco, and RTP
Describe basic IMS operations
Explain how IMS enables dynamic Quality of Service (QoS)
Explain how IMS provides a service delivery platform
Discuss the IMS security architecture
Describe the IMS interconnection strategy
Explain how IMS is being used to provide service continuity between
different access networks
Depict scenarios that illustrate interworking with the PSTN
Sketch the IMS charging architecture

Suggested Prerequisites
IP Convergence Essentials (Instructor Led)
Overview of IMS (eLearning)

1. Introduction
1.1. The IP convergence big picture
1.2. Motivation and benefits of IMS

2. SIP Overview
2.1. Reference architecture
2.2. Operations

3. IMS Architecture
3.1. Reference architecture
3.2. Components and functions
3.3. CSCF, HSS, MGCF, MGW, etc.

4. IMS Signaling Protocols


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

IMS core network interfaces


IMS SIP
Diameter
Media protocols H.248, RTP, RTCP

5. IMS Basic Operations - Registration


5.1. Overview
5.2. Discovery and selection of nodes
5.3. Authentication

6. IMS Basic Operations Call Scenario


6.1. Overview
6.2. Media and QoS negotiation
6.3. Interworking with PSTN

7. IMS QoS

8. IMS Services
8.1. IMS application server
architecture
8.2. End to end applications
8.3. Network based applications
8.4. Media server interactions
8.5. Service Configuration (XCAP)

9. IMS Security
9.1. Key security challenges
9.2. Signaling and media protection
9.3. NAT/firewall traversal

10. Interconnection
10.1. IBCF
10.2. IPv6/IPv4
10.3. IMS SIP to Non-IMS SIP
10.4. IMS SIP to Non-SIP

11. IMS Mobility


11.1. IMS Centralized Services (ICS)
11.2. IMS Service Continuity (ISC)
11.3. SRVCC

12. Charging
12.1. Charging architecture
12.2. Offline charging
12.3. Online charging

7.1. 3GPP policy and charging control


7.2. QoS flow example

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.2

69

Exploring SIP, VoIP and IP Convergence with IMS


Instructor Led | Duration: 4 Days

As wireless and wireline networks mature, data usage increases, and network infrastructure and services become more IP-centric, more personnel will be
responsible for managing and working with IP-centric networks. A solid understanding of IP and data communications will be essential for personnel at all
levels to be effective in a data-oriented environment. This course provides the background and concepts to understand the motivations of networks converging
towards IP, how VoIP services operate on top of the newly converged network, and examines SIP, the dominant VoIP signaling protocol. It discusses the
challenges of transport of media (voice and video) using IP (VoIP) as the transport service in telecommunication networks. It presents the unique flavor of this
challenge from the perspective of the three basic types of network for the telecommunications world: Access networks, core networks, and services networks.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended for those familiar with circuit-switched networks, IPbased data networks and wireless networks.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Define IP Convergence
Explain the possible evolution paths of todays networks
Sketch the new IP converged network architecture
List the motivations for adopting voice over IP
Outline the steps to setup a VoIP call
Describe the requirements of QoS for real-time IP transport
Sketch QoS solutions for real-time IP transport
Define and explain the use of codecs
Discuss authentication and authorization for VoIP
Explain the SIP protocol and operations for session establishment,
changes, and termination
Give the correct syntax for and explain the proper use of SIPs
request and response messages
Differentiate stateless, stateful and forking proxy servers
Recognize how SIP interacts with other signaling protocols
Describe the interworking with PSTN for VoIP
Dissect SIP traces for typical SIP services including VoIP
Describe LTE and IMS at a high level

Suggested Prerequisites
IP Networking Workshop (Instructor Led)
70

1. IP Convergence Overview
1.1. Defining IP convergence
1.2. Motivations for convergence

1.2.1. Quad play


1.2.2. Other converged services

1.3. IP converged architecture


2. Setting up a Call: Voice over IP
2.1. Voice over IP call flow
2.1.1.
2.1.2.
2.1.3.
2.1.4.

Authentication
Authorization/admission control
QoS negotiation
Traffic flow monitoring

2.2. Video over IP call flow


2.3. SIP and SDP basics

3. QoS Requirements and Solutions


3.1. Carrier grade QoS and challenges

3.1.1. Voice/video quality, packet loss


3.1.2. Delay and jitter

3.2. Possible solutions


3.2.1.
3.2.2.
3.2.3.
3.2.4.

Over engineer
ATM/IP/MPLS
Intserv/diffserv
Adapting QoS

3.3. Intra-domain and Inter-domain QoS


3.3.1. SLAs

4. User Traffic Operations


4.1. Device traffic operations

4.1.1. Voice/video coding


4.1.2. Jitter handling

4.2. Edge network traffic operations


4.2.1. Header compression
4.2.2. Intserv-RSVP

4.3. Core network traffic operations


4.3.1. Diffserv

4.4. QoS policy enforcement

5. Interworking with Other Networks


5.1. Architecture and media gateways
5.2. SS7 signaling and IP
5.3. Megaco
5.4. End-to-end call set up with PSTN
5.5. Call setup for other edge network types
6. SIP Architecture
6.1. User agents
6.2. B2BUA

2013Award
Award
Solutions,
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

2013
Solutions,
Inc.

6.3.
6.4.
6.5.
6.6.
6.7.

Proxy and redirect servers


The role of DNS
Registrar and location services
Peer-to-peer
Service Provider E2E architecture

7. SIP Protocol and Basic Operations


7.1. Transactions, dialogs and sessions
7.2. Message formats
7.3. Session Description Protocol (SDP)
7.4. The SDP offer/answer model
7.5. SIP transport options
7.6. Basic session establishment
7.7. Session establishment with
preconditions
7.8. Media transport using RTP or RTSP
8. Key SIP Operations
8.1. Common headers
8.2. Address of record and contact
address
8.3. Registration and de-registration
8.4. The routing of requests and
responses
8.5. Capability discovery
8.6. Signaling compression
9. Events and Presence
9.1. Events and event packages
9.2. Presence architecture
9.3. SUBSCRIBE and NOTIFY methods
10. SIP Security
10.1. Digest and proxy authentication
10.2. Encryption and privacy
10.3. Firewall and NAT traversal
10.3.1. STUN, ALG, ICE, UPnP

11. LTE in a Nutshell


11.1. Architecture
11.2. LTE radio tech
11.3. End-to-end data session setup
11.4. LTE interworking with 3G
12. IMS in a Nutshell
12.1. Motivation and architecture
12.2. IMS call model
12.3. End-to-end IMS session setup
12.4. Roaming with IMS
v1.0

Exploring Ethernet Backhaul

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: IPC_205


The 4th generation (4G) of wireless technologies promises a much higher air interface data rate (over 100 Mbps) to users while reducing the cost per bit for
wireless service providers. The current T1/E1 backhaul will not be able to support the high data rate with reasonable costs. The backhaul is already becoming
the bottleneck in the existing 3G networks and will continue to be a challenge for emerging 4G networks. These networks require IP based broadband
backhaul solutions. This course provides the background and solutions for IP backhaul planning for 3G/4G radio networks, starting with a review of the trends
in 3G/4G wireless data services and related backhaul challenges. An overview of IP/MPLS is given since it is seen as an emerging technology for backhaul
operation. Finally, deployment considerations and a backhaul migration path are discussed along with an exercise to calculate backhaul requirements.

Intended Audience

This course is designed for those involved in planning, design and


engineering of 3G/4G backhaul systems. It is suitable for backhaul
network engineers and managers involved in deployment and operation of
3G/4G networks.

1. LTE and EBH Motivation


1.1. Motivation
1.2. End-to-end network architecture
1.3. Possible EBH solutions

2. L2 Backhaul Solution

Learning Objectives

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


List the requirements and challenges for 3G/4G backhaul
List 3G/4G wireless network backhaul options
Compare different backhaul facilities and explain the pros and cons
of the available solutions
Discuss the role of these key technologies from a backhaul
perspective, their operations and support: ATM, TDM, MPLS, Carrier
Ethernet and IP
Sketch the 2G/3G/4G integrated IP/Ethernet backhaul deployment
architecture with full redundancy
Compare key traditional and packet based timing and
synchronization methods such as IEEE 1588
Apply the end-to-end QoS concepts in IP and Ethernet integrated
backhaul and their usage in SLA monitoring
Calculate protocol overhead for various backhaul options for voice,
Web, video, etc.
Utilize traffic models to forecast backhaul requirements and
calculate link bandwidths
Explain backhaul/Ethernet testing scenarios with RFC 2544 and
Y.1731 in-network testing

Suggested Prerequisites

Course Outline

Basic knowledge of transport such as T1/E1 and SONET/SDH

2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

L2 backhaul architecture
VLANs, subnets
Static routes
Use of MPLS in backhaul
2G, 3G and LTE paths

3. L3 Backhaul Solution
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

L3 backhaul architecture
VLANs, subnets
Static routes
Use of OSPF in backhaul
2G, 3G and LTE paths

4. Metro/Carrier E Technology and


Operations
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

Motivation and benefits


Network architecture
Service types
Service attributes
Circuit emulation CESoPSN

5. Ethernet Backhaul Network Design


Considerations
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

6. QoS, Timing and SLA


6.1. 2G/3G/LTE backhaul traffic
profiles
6.2. End-to-end QoS support
6.3. Timing and synchronization
6.4. Packet mode timing IEEE 1588v2
6.5. OAM and performance metrics
6.6. SLA administration and
monitoring

7. Ethernet Backhaul Network Testing


and Deployment
7.1. Backhaul network testing with
RFC2544
7.2. Backhaul network turn-up
7.3. Network level testing with Y.1731
7.4. E-OAM and CFM

8. Ethernet Backhaul Network


Planning
8.1. Network planning overview
8.2. Capacity planning issues
8.3. Backhaul technology selection
criteria
8.4. Traffic forecast and modeling
8.5. Bandwidth/capacity computation

IP network routing/operations
Layer 2 and 3 design aspects
Redundancy in the backhaul network
Availability and resiliency

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.4

71

Voice and Video over IP Protocols and Technologies


Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: IPC_206

Quad Play (voice, video, data and wireless) is the name of the game for the latest evolution in the communications industry. IP networks are the base on which
these service are converging to deliver rich multimedia services to the consumer and enterprises. More personnel will be responsible for operating,
maintaining and working with IP-centric networks. This course provides essential knowledge on voice and video services using IP (VoIP) in communications
networks. We begin the course with an overview of the motivation and network architectures of today and tomorrow. We then provide an end-to-end view of call
setup to establish voice and video services over IP networks. The course includes several exercises to reinforce key objectives. Throughout the course major
protocols and technologies such as IP multicasting, SIP, H.248/GCP, IGMP, RTSP, SDP, RSVP, RTP, RTCP, MPLS, etc. are discussed as appropriate.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended for those familiar with circuit-switched networks,


IP-based data networks and wireless networks.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List the motivations of delivering voice and video over IP


Sketch the changes in network architecture for VoIP
Outline the steps to setup a VoIP call and a video call
List and discuss key protocols used in edge (access) networks
List and discuss key protocols used in core networks
Describe the requirements of QoS for real-time IP transport
Sketch QoS solutions for voice & video in IP networks
Analyze the interworking of VoIP with legacy networks
Discuss authentication and authorization for VoIP
Identify access independent (core) functions
Identify access dependent functions
List security threats and solutions for VoIP networks
Identify Key Performance Indicators (KPI) for VoIP
Analyze capacity planning

Suggested Prerequisites
Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)

72

1. Introduction to Voice and Video over


IP
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.

The convergence of communications


Motivation for VoIP
Network architecture
Key requirements

2. Setting up a Call: Voice and Video


over IP
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
2.7.

SIP architecture
SIP session basics
Capability discovery
Routing of SIP messages
Dialog identification
Extending SIP
Mechanisms for QoS

3. Facilities-based IPTV
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Why IPTV
IPTV growth
IP unicasting and multicasting
IPTV network

5. User Traffic Operations


5.1. Device based traffic operations
5.1.1. Voice/video coding
5.1.2. Jitter handling
5.2. Access network traffic operations
5.3. Core network traffic operations
5.4. QoS policy enforcement

6. Interworking with Other Networks


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

Architecture and media gateways


SS7 signaling and IP
Megaco
End-to-end call set up with PSTN

7. Deployment Considerations
7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.

VoIP network design


Capacity planning
Key performance indicators
Security

4. Quality of Service (QoS)


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

Qos tools
The IntServ/RSVP solution
The Prioritiation story
The Label Switching story
The InterDomain QoS story

2013Award
Award
Solutions,
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

2013
Solutions,
Inc.

v1.1

Exploring IP Routing and Ethernet Bridging


Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: IPC_207

IP Convergence is the key enabler for wireless, wire-line, cable and enterprise networks of the future. In-depth understanding of Interconnection of IP and
Ethernet networks is essential for those designing, operating and monitoring large complex carrier networks. This course focuses on technologies and
protocols used to connect different IP networks and Ethernet LAN segments to create large and complex IP networks using both Ethernet switching (Layer 2)
and IP/MPLS routing (Layer 3). The course covers IP routing Protocols such as OSPF and BGPv4, as well as Ethernet bridging protocols STP, RSTP, MSTP and
PVSTP+. In addition, the use of MPLS to interconnect networks through Layer 3 Virtual Private Networks (L3VPN) is covered in the course.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended for those who are engaged in planning, operating
and monitoring complex IP/Ethernet networks.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Sketch/configure Ethernet bridging solutions with L2 protocols such
as MSTP
Implement L2 redundancy using MSTP
Explain IP routing concepts
Implement basic multi-area OSPF routed networks
Detail the functions and the usage of the BGPv4 protocol
Implement BGP routed VPN solution
Isolate routing amongst different VRFs
List and explain key routing issues
Sketch how OSPF and BGP routing protocols and STP come together
in a 3G/4G wireless network
Troubleshoot basic routing failures

Suggested Prerequisites
IP Networking Workshop (Instructor Led)

1. Prologue
1.1. Routing and switching in 4G an
end-to-end view
1.2. The lab configuration

2. Spanning Tree Protocol


2.1. Concepts
2.2. Rapid STP (RSTP)
2.3. Multiple STP (MSTP)

3. The Routing Table


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.

How to read a routing table


Administrative distance
Longest match rule
Equal cost multiple path
Recursive searches
Troubleshooting black holes
Redistribution

4. OSPF Key Concepts


4.1. OSPF areas
4.2. Router types
4.3. Link state advertisements

5. OSPF in Wireless Networks


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

Neighbor discovery
Adjacencies
Database synchronization
End-to-end scenarios
5.4.1. Route propagation
5.4.2. Traffic flows

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

6. L3 VPNs in Wireless
6.1. Interconnecting MTSOs
6.2. Architecture
6.3. High level operations

7. BGPv4 Key Concepts


7.1. iBGP and eBGP
7.2. Route reflectors
7.3. Confederations

8. BGPv4 in Wireless Networks


8.1. Route manipulation using BGP
attributes
8.2. BGP communities
8.3. BGP path determination

9. L3VPN Routing
9.1. Provider/customer model
9.2. VPN Routing and Forwarding
(VRF)
9.3. VPN route distribution
9.4. VPN-IPv4 address family
9.5. Route distinguishers
9.6. Route targets

10. Putting it all together


10.1. End-to-end routing
10.2. End-to-end traffic
10.3. Routing issues
10.3.1. Route flapping
10.3.2. Convergence

v1.2

73

Ethernet Backhaul Planning

Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: IPC_301


The 4th generation (4G) of wireless technologies promises a much higher air interface data rate (over 100 Mbps) to users. Delivering such high data rates requires a
very fast and efficient backhaul network. The current T1/E1 backhaul cannot support such high data rate with reasonable costs. These broadband networks require
all-IP and Ethernet based broadband backhaul solutions. The first two days of this course explore various technology options and architectures for Ethernet backhaul
solutions, including MPLS, Metro Ethernet over fiber, copper and microwave radio deployments. The third day introduces various planning tools needed for multimedia
network planning. This requires a management network capably of viewing the applications network as a system rather that a series of network elements. The course
focuses on demonstrating methods for estimating the backhaul requirements based on the type of geography served, expected adoption of new networks and traffic
models for key applications. This is demonstrated through a detailed capacity planning exercise using Excel spreadsheets provided to the participants.

Intended Audience

This course is designed for those involved in planning, design and engineering
of 3G/4G backhaul systems. It is suitable for those who want to learn various
strategies for sizing and deploying Ethernet backhaul.

Learning Objectives

After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List the requirements and challenges for 3G/4G backhaul and wireless
network backhaul options along with comparing different backhaul
facilities and explain the pros and cons of the available solutions
Discuss the role of these key technologies from a backhaul perspective,
their operations and support: ATM, TDM, MPLS, Carrier Ethernet and IP
Sketch the 2G/3G/4G integrated IP/Ethernet backhaul deployment
architecture
Compare key traditional and packet based timing and synchronization
methods such as IEEE 1588
Describe the evolution of todays TDM-based backhaul to tomorrows
Ethernet-based backhaul
Apply the end-to-end QoS concepts in IP and Ethernet integrated backhaul
and their usage in SLA monitoring
Demonstrate how reliability analysis is used to achieve network
availability requirements
Outline the basic tasks in estimating backhaul capacity requirements for
multimedia services
Apply diffusion modeling techniques to forecast subscriber mixes
Apply traffic modeling to estimate throughput requirements and oversubscription factors and use results to estimate IP backhaul link
capacities required to meet stated QoS requirements

Required Equipment

74

1. The Big Picture


1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.

IP convergence
Evolving radio technology
2G/3G/4G backhaul architecture
IP Backhaul requirements

2. Wireless Network Backhaul Options


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

Overview of wireless backhaul


Key Ethernet transport options
Access network alternatives
Aggregation network alternatives
Global deployment landscape

3. Overview of ATM
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

ATM fundamentals
ATM adaptation layer
ATM QoS
IMA for wireless backhaul

4. MPLS Technology Overview


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

IP fundamentals for MPLS


IP routing and forwarding
MPLS fundamentals
L2VPNs
4.4.1. Pseudowires
4.4.2. VPLS; H-VPLS
4.5. L3VPNs

5. Microwave Technology Overview

PC laptop supporting Microsoft Excel

Suggested Prerequisites

Course Outline

IP Convergence Essentials (Instructor Led)


Basic knowledge of telecommunications (T1/E1, SONET/SDH, etc.)
Basic understanding of data networking concepts such as IP routing
and protocol stacks

5.1. Benefits and challenges on


microwave
5.2. Deployment topologies
5.3. When to use/avoid
5.4. Microwave planning considerations

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

6. Ethernet-Based Backhaul Solutions


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.
6.6.
6.7.

Ethernet basics
Carrier Ethernet (CE) defined
Ethernet Services Model (ESM)
CE service attributes
Circuit bonding
Circuit emulation over Ethernet
Timing considerations

7. Wireless Backhaul Evolution


Scenario
7.1. 2G./3G/4G backhaul basics
7.2. TDM to Ethernet evolution
scenario

8. Capacity Planning for Multimedia


Wireless Backhaul
8.1. Network planning overview
8.2. Capacity planning issues
8.3. Overview of wireless multimedia
backhaul planning
8.4. Traffic characterization
8.5. Effective bandwidth
8.6. Subscriber forecasting

9. Mini-Backhaul Capacity Planning


Workshop - Exercises
9.1. Exercise scenario description
9.2. Exercise plan
9.2.1. Subscriber forecasting
9.2.2. Subscriber characterization
9.2.3. Traffic modeling
9.2.4. Traffic geography
9.2.5. Effective bandwidth
v1.2

SIP and Diameter for IMS/VoLTE


Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days

The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) technology is a flexible and extensible protocol for making, changing, and terminating data sessions between one or more
participants. SIP has been adopted by many wireless and wireline telecommunications providers. While the basic operations of the protocol are simple and
straightforward, its level of sophistication and functional richness warrant a detailed analysis. This course provides an overview of the SIP architecture, related
protocols and Diameter in the context of IMS and VoLTE. The focus is to provide an introduction to the SIP architecture, SIP protocol and Diameter to
understand how these protocols come together with IMS and LTE to deliver voice services. Students will then step through some key SIP and Diameter
operations as they relate to delivering Voice services. The course concludes with a discussion of a Call Setup scenario to tie all the concepts together.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This introductory course addresses the needs of technical professionals


who need to understand the use of SIP and Diameter in the context of IMS
and LTE to deploy VoLTE services.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Explain the motivation for SIP for IMS and VoLTE


Describe the SIP architecture for IMS
List the key nodes and interfaces for IMS and VoLTE
Recognize how SIP interacts with other significant signaling
protocols
Describe Diameter and its role in the context of IMS/VoLTE
Describe Megaco and its role in the context of IMS/VoLTE
Explain the SIP protocol and operations for session establishment
and session changes
Describe key SIP operations including registration and
authentication
Synthesize at a high-level the concepts of SIP and Diameter and
how they apply to delivering VoLTE using IMS.

Suggested Prerequisites
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) (eLearning)
Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview (eLearning)

1. SIP Architecture for IMS


1.1. Reference architecture
1.2. Nodes and functions
1.2.1. CSCF, HSS
1.2.2. UE, AS, PCRF, PCEF
1.2.3. BGCF, MGCF, MGW
1.2.4. IBCF, TRGW
1.3. Interfaces
1.3.1. SIP interfaces
1.3.2. Diameter interfaces
1.3.2.1. Cx, Rx, Gx
1.3.3. Megaco interfaces

2. SIP and Related Protocols

5. Registration and Events


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

Registration
Authentication
User profile
Roles of application servers

6. SIP Operations
6.1. Call Setup
6.1.1. INVITE
6.1.2. ReINVITE
6.1.3. SIP/SDP
6.1.4. Megaco

7. Putting It All Together


7.1. VoLTE call setup

2.1. Transactions, dialogs and sessions


2.2. Message formats
2.3. SIP
2.3.1. SIP extensions
2.3.2. SDP
2.4. RTP/RTCP

3. Diameter
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

Architecture and protocol


Message formats
Diameter extensions
DRA
Interface examples

4. Megaco
4.1. Message formats
4.2. Transactions
4.3. Contexts

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.0

75

Exploring Cloud Computing Service Models


Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days

Cloud Computing (CC) is a multifaceted technology generally characterized by its Service Model (SM) type (Software as a Service SaaS, Platform as a Service
- PaaS, Infrastructure as a Service IaaS). From a users perspective SaaS is the simplest, since the Cloud service provider provides everything (software,
hardware, management of infrastructure, etc.). IaaS is the other extreme where the Cloud user must manage its own Virtual Machine (VM), but has the ability
to configure it in any manner desired. This course will focus on Cloud Computing from the view of the SMs and presents a high level comparison of the three
primary SMs, and where they may fit into a wireless networking environment. Students will be challenged throughout the course with review questions and
relevant exercises, to reinforce the topics presented in the course material.

Course Outline

Intended Audience
This course is intended for a technical audience interested in
understanding the basics of Cloud Computing Service Models in the
context of a Wireless Service Providers network.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the motivation for deploying each of the three CC SMs
Describe the differences between SaaS, PaaS, and IaaS
Describe the economics of each SM as viewed by the user
Describe the economics of each SM as viewed by the provider
Explain each SM in the context of a Wireless Provider domains
List the technologies upon which CC is based
Describe the virtualization process for IaaS
Illustrate changes for Next Generation Data Centers
Illustrate preferred operational scenarios for each SM
Explain the role and tasks of a Hypervisor (VMM)
Sketch the virtualized CC architecture
Describe the key management issues faced by each SM

Suggested Prerequisites
Cloud Computing Essentials for Business (Instructor Led)

1. Background
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.

CC overview
SM preview (SaaS, PaaS, IaaS)
CC SMs vs. deployment models
Role of BPaaS
Commercial SM solutions
CC taxonomy and basic architecture

2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

CC system and software models


Distributed system models
Phased approach to CC deployment
CC evolution: SOA to CC to IoT
CC standards organizations

2. CC Basics

3. Economics of three CC SMs

3.1. Business drivers


3.2. Business model ontology and
framework
3.3. Revenue model and pricing options
3.4. Cost model and business challenges
3.5. Economics user vs. provider
3.6. Integration of BSS and OSS
3.7. Management functions added for
public Clouds

4. Three CC SMs and Wireless


Networking
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

Applicability to the wireless domain


Redundancy and high availability
Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)
Interworking challenges

5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.

SaaS overview and architecture


User vs. CC provider view
Distinct roles
Operations
Management issues

5. SaaS Architecture

6. PaaS Architecture

6.1. PaaS overview and architecture


6.2. User vs. CC provider view
6.3. Distinct roles

76

2013
2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727

6.4. Operations
6.5. Network based systems
6.6. Management issues

7. IaaS Architecture
7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
7.5.
7.6.
7.7.

IaaS overview and architecture


User vs. CC provider view
Distinct roles
Operations
Platform evolution
Network based systems
Management issues

8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.

BPaaS vs. (SaaS/PaaS/IaaS)


BPaaS architecture
BPaaS market drivers
BPaaS now and future

9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.

Virtualization (VM)
Hypervisor described
Hypervisor architecture
Hypervisor tasks
9.4.1. Manage shared info
9.4.2. Grants, memory
management
9.4.3. VM scheduling and APIs

8. Business Process as a Service


(BPaaS)

9. Virtualization (PaaS; IaaS)

10. Next Gen Data Centers

10.1. Data management challenges


10.2. Next gen data center architecture
10.3. Storage virtualization
10.4. Design evolution
10.4.1. vPC, HSRP/VRRP
10.4.2. L2MP/TRILL
10.4.3. FCoE
10.4.4. Multitenancy
10.5. New FC protocols

11. Putting it all together

11.1. Example end-to-end operations


11.1.1. SaaS, PaaS, IaaS
11.1.2. BPaaS
v1.0

Exploring Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS)


Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days

The definition of Cloud Computing (CC) is still evolving, but generally consists of an aggregation of computing resources that work cooperatively as a single
computing resource. The course starts with a look at the definition and economics of CC and the IaaS model. This unified computing resource can be
partitioned on request to define Virtual Machines (VMs) that CC user may request and pay on a usage basis. The primary CC service models are; SaaS
(Software as a Service), PaaS (Platform as a Service), and IaaS (Infrastructure as a Service). Of the three models, IaaS offers the CC user the greatest flexibility
and delegates to the CC user the most responsibility. Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA) is a complementary technology to CC and this relationship will be
briefly reviewed. Students will be challenged throughout with review questions and relevant exercises, to reinforce the topics presented in the course material.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended for a technical audience interested in


understanding the Infrastructure as a Service model in the context of a
Telecom Service Providers network.

1. Background

1.1. Motivation for CC and IaaS


1.2. Commercial IaaS vendors
1.3. CC taxonomy and basic architecture

2. Cloud Computing Models

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the motivation for implementing IaaS
Describe the economics of and IaaS deployment
Explain IaaS in the context of a Telecom Providers domain
Define IaaS and Cloud Computing
List the technologies upon which CC is based
Describe the differences between SaaS, PaaS, and IaaS
Discuss when IaaS would be the preferred SPI model
Explain the role and tasks of a Hypervisor (VMM)
Discuss the role of Virtualization in CC
Describe where Data Centers and SANs fit into the CC architecture
Outline the key IaaS Management issues
Identify the key capacity planning issues

Suggested Prerequisites
Cloud Computing Essentials for Business (Instructor Led)

2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.

CC system and software models


CC delivery models (SPI)
Distributed system models
Phased approach to CC deployment
CC evolution: SOA to CC to IoT
Vendor overview

3. Economics of IaaS Models

3.1. Business drivers


3.2. Business model ontology and
framework
3.3. Revenue model and pricing options
3.4. Cost model and business challenges

4. IaaS Architecture
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.
4.6.

Platform evolution
Network based systems
Constructing IaaS
Cloud centers
Infrastructure web service
Cloud extenders

5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.
5.6.
5.7.

Virtualization (VM)
Hypervisor described
Hypervisor architecture
Hypervisor tasks
Manage shared Info
Grants, memory management
VM scheduling and APIs

5. IaaS Hypervisor

6. IaaS Operations

6.1. Description and CC role of IaaS


6.2. Primary building blocks of IaaS
6.3. Services and service-oriented
infrastructure
6.4. Service fulfillment

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

6.5. Strategy, design, operation


6.6. IaaS operational management
6.7. Demand management
6.8. Financial management
6.9. Change management
6.10. Cloud bursting
6.11. Multi-tenant concept
6.12. Key IaaS vendors
6.13. Future: The Internet of Things (IoT)

7. Data Centers and SANs


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
7.5.
7.6.

Data management challenges


Next gen data centers
Storage virtualization
vPC and HSRP
Ethernet link and FCoE
New FC protocols

8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.

Applicability to the Telecom domain


Redundancy and high availability
Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)
Interworking challenges

8. IaaS and the Telecom Provider

9. IaaS Management Issues

9.1. QoS; security; performance


9.2. Management Platform (CIMP)
9.3. Availability and reliability analysis
in IaaS
9.4. Management topics
9.5. Hierarchical management
9.6. Policy-based management
9.7. Mgmt mediation

10. IaaS CC Capacity Planning

10.1. Capacity
10.2. IaaS user view
10.3. IaaS provider view
10.4. IaaS capacity planning
10.5. Impact of random demand

11. Putting it all together

11.1. Example end-to-end operations


11.2. Exercise
v1.0

77

Exploring the Service Oriented Architecture (SOA)


Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days

Service Oriented Architecture (SOA) is basically a collection of services that are able to communicate with each other. To understand how this works we begin
with a definition of what a service is. The course will provide a more detailed description of Service but we begin with the assumption that it is a selfcontained function that is well-defined, and independent of context or state of other Services. SOA defines how to integrate disparate applications for a Webbased environment and may involve the use of multiple computing platforms. SOA and Cloud Computing (CC) are complementary activities and CC can provide
a value-added base for SOA efforts. Also, IMS is a candidate architecture upon which SOA may be deployed. A scenario is presented where IMS is used to
support the SOA model being deployed. SOA 2.0 (Event-Driven SOA) is the evolution of SOA (SOA 1.0). Students will be challenged throughout with review
questions and relevant exercises, to reinforce the topics presented in the course material.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended for a technical audience interested in


understanding the Service Oriented Architecture in the context of a
Telecom Service Providers network.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the difference between SOA and CC
List the key benefits and challenges of SOA networks
Define the term Service
Explain SOA in the context of a Telecom Providers domain
Sketch the basic SOA architecture
Illustrate the SOA types
Explain the basic properties of SOA
Illustrate the Basic Provider-Consumer SOA Model
Explain the role that IMS can play in an SOA network
Sketch a general IMS network architecture
List key SOA sup[porting technologies
Discuss how SOA 2.0 extends the function of SOA 1.0
Describe how the Causal Vector Engine is used in SOA 2.0

Suggested Prerequisites
Cloud Computing Essentials for Business (Instructor Led)

78

1. SOA Overview
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.

SOA Defined and Described


SOA Principles
SOA vs. CC
Benefits and Challenges
Vendors

2. SOA Basic Concepts

2.1. What is a Service?


2.2. Service Orientation
2.3. SOA Properties
2.4. Types of SOAs
2.5. SOA Properties
2.6. Logical View
2.7. Message Orientation
2.8. Description Orientation
2.9. Metadata Catalogs
2.10. Database Publish-Subscribe
2.11. Key Supporting Technologies
2.12. SOAP
2.13. REST
2.14. CORBA

3. SOA Architecture

3.1. SOA Development Options


3.2. Service Oriented Modeling
Framework (SOMF)
3.3. SOA Components
3.4. Registries and Repository
3.5. Service Broker
3.6. Infrastructure Services
3.7. BPOM
3.8. Service Bus
3.9. SOA Meta Model
3.10. Grid Services and OGSA

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

3.11. Service Connection Architecture


(SCA)

4. SOA Deployment
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

Basic Provider-Consumer Model


SOA Building Blocks
Orchestration and Automation
Job Execution Environments and
Monitoring
4.5. Workflow in SOA
4.6. SOA and Web 2.0
4.7. Deployment Scenario

5. IMS Basics
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.

IMS Architecture
Basics of SIP
Role of the AS
Subscriber profile
SOA in IMS Scenario

6. SOA and the Telecom Provider

6.1. Applicability to the Telecom


domain
6.2. Redundancy and High Availability
6.3. Key Performance Indicators
6.4. Interworking challenges

7. Event Driven SOA (SOA 2.0)


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
7.5.

Description
Causal Vector Engine
SOA 2.0 scenario
Closed System Modeling
Data Enrichment and Mediation
Flows
7.6. SOA 2.0-IMS Scenario

8. Putting it all together

8.1. Example end-to-end operations


8.2. Exercise
v1.0

UMTS/HSPA+
UMTS (WCDMA) is a 3G technology deployed throughout the world. It evolved from the GSM/GPRS core network, and redefined the radio access
network. It gives users a comprehensive, user-friendly and personalized mobile experience with a combined voice and data network.
The UMTS (WCDMA) and HSPA+ system replaces the Circuit Switched Core Network (CS-CN) with a SIP-based network and an IP-based radio access
network. These enhancements provide all services on one consolidated, IP-based wireless network.

About the Curriculum

Award Solutions UMTS (WCDMA) and HSPA+ curriculum offers a suite of


courses appropriate for all audiences - from executives in need of a quick
overview to designers and developers seeking the details of the messages,
including the parameters and the rationale behind the standards.

Self-paced eLearning Courses

Welcome To UMTS
Overview of UMTS
UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals
UMTS Signaling
UMTS Mobility
HSDPA (R5)
HSUPA (R6)
HSPA+ Overview (R7)

Instructor Led Courses

Exploring UMTS (WCDMA)


Exploring HSPA+ (R7, R8 & R9)
Multi-Carrier HSPA+ (R8 & R9)
Mastering UMTS Core Networks (R99 to R7)
Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling
Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling
HSPA+ Protocols and Signaling (R7, R8 & R9)
IMS in UMTS (R8) Networks
3GPP Packet Core Networks (R99 to R8)
UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+ Air Interface
UMTS/HSPA (WCDMA) RF Design Mentoring
UMTS (WCDMA) RF Optimization Mentoring
UMTS/HSPA+ Optimization Workshop

Welcome to UMTS eLearning Course

Please refer to the LTE curriculum for the UMTS evolution path to LTE.

2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

79

Welcome To UMTS

eLearning | Average Duration: 1.5 hours | Course Number: UMTS102


Wireless communications have come a long way from early implementations to todays wide offering of available services. This course provides a UMTS
overview of mobile wireless communications. Mobile wireless networks, their elements and their functions are described. A description of mobile wireless
services and their delivery to the mobile subscriber is also provided. There is a brief look at the evolution of UMTS to 4G technologies. This course is intended
for individuals who desire a general understanding of mobile wireless communications focused on UMTS. Participants are not required to be technically
oriented to benefit from this course. At the conclusion of this course, participants will have a familiarity with mobile wireless communications, the networks
and their elements, their functions and operations required to deliver voice and data service.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for individuals who are new to the wireless industry
or desire a general level understanding of wireless communications.
Participants are not required to be technically oriented to benefit from this
course.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List the key motivations for moving from 2G to 3G


Identify the difference between GSM/GPRS and UMTS
Identify UMTS network elements and their functions
Describe UMTS Service Delivery call flows
Describe the evolution moving forward from UMTS

Suggested Prerequisites
Welcome to Wireless Networks (eLearning)
Welcome to GSM/GPRS (eLearning)

Complementary Courses
Exploring GSM (Instructor Led)
Exploring GPRS and EDGE (Instructor Led)
Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor Led)

80

1. Introduction
2. History from 2G to 3G
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

Evolution of wireless technologies


2G limitations
2.5G technology
Evolution from 2.5G to 3G
Why UMTS

3. UMTS Network
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.
3.8.
3.9.

What is UMTS
Wideband CDMA
Comparison of technologies
GSM/GPRS 2G networks
GSM/GPRS 2.5G networks
UMTS network
UMTS Radio network
Interface core network and UTRAN
UMTS key features

4. Service Delivery
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.
4.6.
4.7.

Radio network acquisition


UMTS behaviors
UMTS attach
UMTS PDP context activation
Data transfer
Context deactivation and detach
Voice call flows

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

5. Moving Forward from UMTS


5.1. UMTS roadmap
5.2. 3G UMTS
5.3. 3G UMTS - HSDPA
5.4. 3G UMTS HSUPA
5.5. 3G UMTS HSPA+
5.6. 3G challenges
5.7. Wish List - 4G
5.8. 4G technology requirements
5.9. 4G building blocks
5.10. Multiple access technologies
5.11. Why OFDM
5.12. Why multiple antennas
5.13. 4G architecture design goals
5.14. Network architecture evolution
5.15. 4G radio network
5.16. 4G core network components
5.17. What is LTE

Put It All Together


Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

v2.0

Overview of UMTS

eLearning | Average Duration: 2 Hours | Course Number: UMTS103


UMTS creates a platform to converge the worlds of speech, data services and the Internet to create a global market for mobile multimedia. This course
discusses the broad scope of UMTS, its characteristics, its features and its evolution from second generation architecture. It also provides the student with a
sampler, which draws the attention of the students to various areas of UMTS such as the access network, core network, services from voice to multimedia
and the future of UMTS.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of UMTS, its
features and capabilities.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Provide a summary of the limitations of 2G wireless networks
Explain the key characteristics of 3G systems and the genesis of
UMTS
Highlight key features of UMTS networks
Describe the UMTS standards releases and their functionality
Identify the elements of the UMTS architecture and understand their
interfaces
Describe traffic delivery of circuit switched and packet switched
information within the UMTS network

Complementary Courses
Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning)

1. Introduction
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.

Applications
Capabilities of 1G and 2G systems
Limitations of 2G
Requirements of 3G

2. 3G Characteristics
2.1. Key 3G characteristics
2.2. Requirements of 3G

3. Genesis of UMTS

7. UMTS Scenarios
7.1. Establish a CS call
7.2. Establish a PS call
7.3. UMTS traffic delivery

8. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

3.1. UMTS standards development


3.2. Modes of operation
3.3. Spectrum allocation

4. Key Features of UMTS


4.1. Backward compatibility with
GSM/GPRS/EDGE open interfaces
4.2. UMTS QoS classes

5. UMTS Road map of Releases


5.1. Sequence
5.2. Features in each release

6. UMTS Architecture
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

Technology landscape
Core network architecture
UTRAN architecture
UMTS interfaces

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v5.0

81

UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals


eLearning | Average Duration: 3 Hours | Course Number: UMTS104

UMTS is an evolution of GSM and GPRS. The air interface has been changed from a Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) based system to a Wideband Code
Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) based air interface. This change was required to achieve the data rate of 2 Mbps to the mobile, which is a 3G requirement.
This course provides the details of the UMTS WCDMA air interface, known as UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA). The WCDMA physical layer is key to
achieving higher data rates and supporting new features. This course provides an overview of the physical layer. In addition, power control and soft handover,
important features of any CDMA air interface, are discussed. The UMTS defined radio interface includes a number of channels, which are presented with an
explanation of their usage. This course concludes with a discussion of how high data rates and multiple simultaneous services are delivered using UMTS.

Intended Audience

This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding of the


WCDMA air interface that is used in UMTS. This includes those in a design,
test, systems engineering, sales engineering network engineering, or
verification role.
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Explain spreading factor codes in UMTS WCDMA
Describe the use of scrambling codes for source identification in
both the uplink and downlink in WCDMA
Describe power control operations in the UMTS WCDMA system
Explain the basics of soft handoff processing from the perspective
of the physical layer
Identify the features designed into the WCDMA system which enable
high data rates
Describe the types of channels found in the UMTS radio interface
and their purpose
Explain how concurrent services are supported by UMTS radio
interface

Overview of UMTS (eLearning)

Complementary Courses
3G Comparative Overview (Instructor Led)
UMTS Signaling (eLearning)
UMTS Mobility (eLearning)

82

1. UMTS WCDMA Overview


1.1. Introduction to Wideband CDMA

2. UMTS WCDMA Channels


2.1. Overview of UMTS channel structure

3. WCDMA Physical Layer Processing

Learning Objectives

Suggested Prerequisites

Knowledge Knuggets

3.1. Protection of data


3.2. Separation channels
3.3. Scrambling codes

7.3. Communication of information


between the UE and the network

8. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

4. WCDMA Power Control


4.1. Introduction to power control
4.2. Requirements of power control
4.3. WCDMA power control process

5. Soft Handover in WCDMA


5.1. Introduction to soft handover
5.2. The RAKE receiver
5.3. Inter radio access technology
handover procedure

6. Delivering High Data Rates in UMTS


6.1. Variable length spreading factors
6.2. Impact of protection on data rates
6.3. How to achieve 2 Mbps
6.3.1. QPSK modulation
6.3.2. Multiple codes

7. Concurrent Services, an Air Interface


Perspective
7.1. Support of multiple simultaneous
services by the mobile
7.2. Support concurrent services

2013 Award
Award
Solutions,
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013
Solutions,
Inc.

v2.0

UMTS Signaling

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 Hour | Course Number: UMTS105


The need for a 3G network to provide more value added services to wireless subscribers has become apparent. UMTS provides a new, "open"
communications universe that will allow service providers to supply a host of new services. All of these services are offered in UMTS using two basic
mechanisms. The first is circuit switched call setup to support the traditional voice based services. The second is packet-switched data session establishment.
This is used to establish data sessions based on the services bandwidth and Quality of Service requirements. This course offers an eLearning experience of
UMTS signaling. This course also discusses the processes of establishing a circuit-switched voice call and a packet-switched data session.

Intended Audience

This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding of the


WCDMA air interface that is used in UMTS. This includes those in a design,
test, systems engineering, sales engineering network engineering, or
verification role.

Learning Objectives

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


Highlight the differences between user plane and control plane
Specify different radio access signaling and core network signaling
protocols
Define the basic circuit-switched call setup in UMTS
Explain how the signaling and control mechanisms are used in
UMTS
Define the Always connected paradigm in UMTS networks
Describe traffic delivery of packet data information within the UMTS
network

Suggested Prerequisites

Overview of UMTS (eLearning)

Knowledge Knuggets

1. Signaling and User Traffic in UMTS


1.1. Signaling responsibilities of network
elements
1.2. Overview of the UMTS signaling (or
control) plane
1.3. Overview of the UMTS traffic (or user)
plane
1.4. UMTS radio access signaling
mechanisms
1.5. UMTS core network signaling
mechanisms
1.6. Signaling protocols on the Iub, Iur
and Iu interfaces

4. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

2. Making a Circuit Switched Phone Call


in UMTS
2.1. Call establishment process
2.2. Information that is exchanged during
call establishment
2.3. Circuit switched core network
protocol model

3. Starting a Packet Session in UMTS

Complementary Courses
Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning)
UMTS Mobility (eLearning)

3.1. UMTS support for the Always


connected paradigm
3.2. Data session establishment process
3.3. Information that is exchanged in
data session establishment
3.4. Tunneling
3.5. Packet switched core network
protocol model

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v2.0

83

UMTS Mobility

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 Hour | Course Number: UMTS106


UMTS is designed to provide value-added services, many of which will allow the subscriber to receive services while on the move. This course discusses the
process of managing mobility in UMTS networks. Mobility management is required while the mobile is idle, in a circuit-switched voice call or in a packetswitched data session. This course covers all these aspects of mobility. In addition, certain UMTS specific mobility features are discussed, and the
participants are provided with an understanding of the mobility aspects of the UMTS network.

Intended Audience

This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding of the


processes of signaling and mobility management during a call or a packet
session. This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales
engineering, network engineering, and verification.

Learning Objectives

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


Describe the UMTS radio mobility aspects
Define the requirements of location management within the UMTS
network
Discuss core network mobility including location areas and routing
areas
Illustrate the differences between mobility when the mobile is idle
and when the mobile is connected
Explain the mobility management messaging used to support
mobility in UMTS

Suggested Prerequisites

Overview of UMTS (eLearning)

Complementary Courses
Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning)
UMTS Signaling (eLearning)

84

Knowledge Knuggets

1. Mobility Management in UMTS


1.1. Introduction to Mobility Management
functions
1.2. Mobility Management responsibilities

2. Mobility Management when the


Mobile is Idle
2.1. Location tracking when the mobile is
in idle mode
2.2. Responsibilities of the mobile in idle
mode

5. Seamless Mobility in UMTS


5.1. Requirements of seamless
mobility
5.2. Procedures for seamless mobility

6. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

3. Mobility Management when the


Mobile is Connected
3.1. Location tracking when the mobile is
connected to the network
3.2. Responsibilities of the mobile when
it is connected
3.3. Mobility management procedures
when the mobile is using common
channels
3.4. Mobility management procedures
when the mobile is using dedicated
channels

4. Serving Radio Network Controller


(SRNC) Relocation
4.1. Responsibilities of the SRNC
4.2. Support provided by the DRNC
4.3. Procedures used in SRNC relocation

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v2.0

HSDPA (R5)

eLearning | Average Duration: 3 Hours | Course Number: UMTS107


UMTS networks are being rapidly deployed in many parts of the world to support 3G voice and packet data services. As the UMTS subscriber base grows,
operators are looking to support next generation packet data services that require very high data rates. To compete with other technologies such as 1xEV-DO,
the UMTS standards group has defined High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) as part of the UMTS (Release 5) standards. This course provides an
overview of the HSDPA R5 technology. It describes the key concepts used in the wireless environment to support high data rates, and examines how these
concepts are applied within the HSDPA R5 standards. HSDPA R5 specific channels are introduced followed by a detailed discussion of the HSDPA physical
layer operations. A discussion of UMTS and HSDPA R5 interworking is also presented. The course concludes with an end-to-end HSDPA R5 call flow.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for those seeking an understanding of HSDPA R5


technology and how it supports high speed packet data. This includes
those in product management, design, test, systems engineering, sales
engineering, network engineering, RF deployment engineering, and field
engineering and operations roles.

1. HSDPA R5 Introduction

Learning Objectives

2. HSDPA R5 Key Concepts

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


Describe HSDPA R5 at a high level
Define important features of HSDPA R5 including peak data rates,
new channels and architectural changes
Discuss the key concepts used in HSDPA R5 to achieve high packet
data rates over the air
Analyze the steps taken in HSDPA R5 physical layer operations to
support high speed packet data
Describe the role of the scheduler in HSDPA R5
Explain how HSDPA R5 achieves data rates over 10Mbps
Discuss cell switching operation on the traffic channel
Walk though an end-to end HSDPA R5 call flow

Suggested Prerequisites
Overview of UMTS (eLearning)
UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (eLearning)

Complementary Courses
UMTS Signaling (eLearning)
UMTS Mobility (eLearning)

1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.

2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

High-level solution
Data rates supported
Packet data characteristics
How does HSDPA address packet
data characteristics?
Link adaptation UMTS vs. HSDPA
Fast channel quality reporting
TDM-CDM scheduling
Adaptive modulation
Hybrid ARQ

3. HSDPA R5 Architecture
3.1. UTRAN architecture review
3.2. HSDPA R5 functions
3.3. HSDPA R5 impact to UTRAN
architecture
3.4. Implementation impact on UE and
UTRAN

5.3. How do we get high data rates?


5.4. Traffic channel scheduler
5.5. UE HSDPA processing steps

6. Mobility
6.1. Active set management
6.2. Traffic channel cell switching

7. End-to-End Call Flow


7.1. Example end-to-end HSDPA R5
call flow

8. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

4. HSDPA R5 Downlink channels


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

HS-DPCCH functions
HS-SCCH functions
HS-DSCH functions
Timing relationship between
channels

5. HSDPA R5 Downlink Operation Details


5.1. Physical layer packet transmission
details
5.2. Hybrid ARQ

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v4.0

85

HSUPA (R6)

eLearning | Average Duration: 2.5 Hours | Course Number: UMTS108


UMTS networks are being rapidly deployed in many parts of the world to support 3G voice and packet data services. As the UMTS subscriber base continues to
grow, operators want to support next generation packet data services that require very high data rates. To compete with other technologies such as 1xEV-DO,
the UMTS standards group has defined High Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA) as part of the UMTS (Release 6) standards. This course provides an
overview of HSUPA technology. It describes the key concepts used in the wireless environment to support high data rates, and examines how these concepts
are applied within the HSUPA standards. In addition, it discusses the impact of HSUPA support on the UMTS network architecture by highlighting key changes
at different nodes. HSUPA specific channels are introduced followed by a detailed discussion of the HSUPA physical layer operations.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for those seeking an understanding of HSUPA


technology and how it supports high speed packet data. This includes
those in product management, design, test, systems engineering, sales
engineering, network engineering, RF deployment engineering, and field
engineering and operations roles.

1. Introduction

1.1. Capabilities and limitations of UMTS


and HSDPA
1.2. Motivation for HSUPA
1.3. Supported data rates of HSUPA

2. Key Concepts of HSUPA

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Describe HSUPA at a high level
Define important features of HSUPA including peak data rates, new
channels and architectural changes
Discuss the key concepts used in HSUPA to achieve high packet
data rates over the air
Analyze the steps taken in HSUPA physical layer operations to
support high speed packet data
Explain the role of the scheduler in HSUPA
Walk through an end-to-end HSUPA call flow

Suggested Prerequisites
UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (eLearning)
HSDPA (R5) (eLearning)

2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

8. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

Effective interference / load control


Fast scheduling at Node B
Absolute and relative grants
Hybrid ARQ

3. HSUPA Architecture Enhancements


3.1. HSUPA impact to UTRAN architecture
3.2. HSUPA functions
3.3. Implementation impact on UE and
UTRAN

4. Enhanced Channels of HSUPA


4.1. Enhanced Uplink Channels E-DCH
and related channels

5. HSUPA Operations
5.1. Physical layer packet transmission
details
5.2. How do we get high data rates?

6. Mobility and Power Control


6.1. Mobility and handover
enhancements
6.2. Power control strategy for E-DCH

7. End-to-End Call Flow


7.1. Example end-to-end HSUPA call flow

86

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v2.0

HSPA+ Overview (R7)

eLearning | Average Duration: 4 Hours | Course Number: UMTS109


UMTS is a 3G cellular technology that is being deployed around the globe to support voice and packet data services. The air interface of the first release of
UMTS (i.e., Release 99) is enhanced by the HSDPA feature of Release 5 and the HSUPA feature of Release 6. Release 7 enhances the UMTS air interface even
further to achieve high peak data rates such as 21 or 28 Mbps in the downlink and 11 Mbps in the uplink. This course provides an overview of the major
enhancements to HSPA (R6) that lead to high peak data rates and lower latency provided in HSPA+. Examples of the topics covered include architecture
enhancements, High Order Modulation (HOM), MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output), CPC (Continuous Packet Connectivity), and radio channel
enhancements. The call setup in HSPA+ is illustrated, and both downlink data transmission and uplink data transmission are discussed.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for those seeking an understanding of HSUPA+


technology and how it enhances downlink and uplink data transfer. This
includes those in product management, design, test, systems engineering,
sales engineering, network engineering, RF deployment engineering, and
field engineering and operations roles.

1. Introduction
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.

Evolution of UMTS
Capabilities and limitations of HSPA
Performance goals for HSPA+
Main features and benefits of HSPA+

2. Key Concepts of HSPA+

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
List key features, benefits and limitations of HSPA+
Sketch the architectural enhancements in HSPA+
Discuss the key concepts in HSPA+ to achieve high packet data
rates in the downlink and the uplink
Describe CPC (Continuous Packet Connectivity)
Summarize the radio channel enhancements
Walk through an end-to-end HSPA+ call flow

Suggested Prerequisites
UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (eLearning)
HSDPA (R5) (eLearning)
HSUPA (R6) (eLearning)

2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.

7. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

High Order Modulation (HOM)


MIMO
CPC
Radio channel enhancements
Architecture options
UE categories and capabilities

3. Downlink Data Transmission


3.1. Overview of HSDPA operation
3.2. High-level view of DL transmission
3.3. HSPA+ enhancements for DL
transmission (ex: MIMO and HSSCCH less operation)

4. Uplink Data Transmission


4.1. Overview of HSUPA operation
4.2. High-level view of UL transmission
4.3. HSPA+ enhancements for UL
transmission (Ex: HOM)

5. CPC (Continuous Packet Connectivity)


5.1. Fast session setup/resumption
5.2. DTX
5.3. DRX

6. End-to-End Call Flow


6.1. End-to-end HSPA+ call flow

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v3.0

87

Exploring UMTS (WCDMA)

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days| Course Number: UMTS201


UMTS (WCDMA) is one of the 3rd generation wireless systems. UMTS is designed to increase a subscribers data rates and system capacity. This course offers
a technical overview of UMTS, focusing on the UMTS (WCDMA) air interface, radio networks and core networks. It covers the network architecture, components
and basic operations of UMTS networks. In addition, this course explores the details of the WCDMA air interface technology and its ability to support multiple
subscribers simultaneously. Aspects of CDMA technology pertaining to the WCDMA air interface including coding, modulation, spreading, scrambling,
handovers and power control mechanisms are clearly explained. This course then focuses on Circuit Switched and Packet Switched Core Networks. The key
concepts in the course are tied together with several system scenarios to provide insight into location management, mobility management and handovers.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended to provide a technical overview of UMTS (WCDMA).


It is appropriate for personnel in planning, deployment, RF engineering,
network performance, and network operations.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Identify the driving forces, requirements and goals of UMTS


List the capabilities of UMTS (WCDMA)
Explain the evolution from GSM/GPRS/EDGE networks
Sketch the network architecture and identify the network nodes and
interfaces
Describe how functions such as mobility management and
handovers are performed in UMTS
Step through the setup of voice and data calls in UMTS networks
Identify the UMTS-GSM interworking scenarios
Discuss the features and benefits of HSDPA and HSUPA

Suggested Prerequisites
Welcome to Wireless Networks (eLearning)
Exploring GSM (Instructor Led)
Exploring GPRS and EDGE (Instructor Led)

1. UMTS Overview
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.

Motivations for 3G
UMTS spectrum
UMTS QoS
UMTS security

2. WCDMA in UMTS
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

Comparison of technologies
Spread spectrum techniques
Channelization and scrambling codes
Power control
Handover and reselection

3. UMTS Core Network


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

Access and non-access stratums


Iu Interface
RANAP
Circuit-switched architecture
Packet-switched architecture

7. Packet-Switched Scenarios
7.1. UMTS basics for packet domain
7.2. Wireless Internet over UMTS

8. System Scenarios
8.1. Mobility Idle state
8.2. Handovers
8.3. SRNS relocation

9. The Evolution of UMTS


9.1. High Speed Downlink Packet
Access (HSDPA)
9.2. HSDPA system architecture
9.3. Key concepts
9.4. High Speed Uplink Packet Access
(HSUPA)
9.5. IP Multimedia Subsystems (IMS)

4. UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access


Network (UTRAN)
4.1. UTRAN functions
4.2. UTRAN components
4.3. UTRAN interfaces

5. UTRAN Channels and Protocols


5.1. Cannel types and channel structure
5.2. RRC and the radio access bearer

6. Circuit-Switched Scenarios
6.1. UE-initiated voice call
6.2. UE-terminated voice call

88

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v4.2

Exploring HSPA+ (R7, R8 & R9)


Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days

This course provides a fundamental understanding of HSPA+ features defined in Release 7 through Release 9. HSPA+ refers to the enhancements of the
basic HSPA operation defined for R5 HSDPA and R6 HSUPA and focuses on the air interface to improve spectral efficiency. The course first gives an overview
of the main HSPA+ features and associated benefits. Once the overview is given, details of the features are discussed based on their primary benefits. First,
the throughput-enhancing features are discussed, and then the features that help lower the latency and/or UE power consumption are narrated. The overall
call setup process is illustrated next with a focus on HSPA+ configuration. Details of the data transfer in the DL and the UL are given. After covering the
deployment and interworking considerations, a description of R9 HSPA+ features is given. This course takes a close look at all the major HSPA+ features.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is designed for those involved in the design, deployment,


operation, and optimization of HSPA+ networks. It is suitable for planners
and engineers responsible for network planning, design and deployment,
integration and network operations.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
List main HSPA+ features and the associated benefits
Identify the impact of HSPA+ on the network and the UE
Explain how HOM, MIMO, and advanced receiver designs enable
high throughput
Describe how DTX, DRX, enhanced CELL_FACH, and the direct
tunnel architecture reduce latency and/or UE power consumption
Summarize how the UE is configured to operate in HSPA+
Illustrate the basic steps of DL and UL data transfer
Discuss upcoming HSPA+ features in R8 and R9, such as Dual Cell
operations in the UL and the combined MIMO feature in the DL

Suggested Prerequisites
Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led)
HSPA+ Overview (R7) (eLearning)

1. HSPA+ Overview

1.1. Evolution of UMTS (R99 to R9)


1.2. HSPA+: Promises and challenges
1.3. Summary of key HSPA+ features and
associated benefits
1.3.1. Antenna techniques for the DL
1.3.2. High-Order Modulation (DL
and UL)
1.3.3. CPC (DTX, DRX, enhanced
CELL_FACH, and HS-SCCHless operation)
1.3.4. Direct tunnel architecture
1.3.5. Dual Cell feature
1.4. Impact of HSPA+ on UE and network
1.4.1. Network upgrades
1.4.2. UE categories and upgrades

2. Features for Throughput


Enhancements

2.1. High-Order Modulation (HOM)


2.1.1. Support of Higher Order
Modulation in UL and DL
2.2. Multiple antenna techniques:
Concepts and implementation
2.2.1. Open loop and closed loop
transmit diversity
2.2.2. (2x2) MIMO
2.3. Layer 2 RLC/MAC enhancements
2.4. Advanced receiver designs
2.5. Dual
2.6. F-DPCH enhancements

3. Features for Improvements in Latency


and Power Consumption
3.1. DTX and DRX

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

3.2. Enhanced CELL_FACH


3.3. Direct tunnel architecture

4. Call Setup and Mobility


Management

4.1. Overall call flow


4.2. HSPA+ configuration
4.3. Mobility management (active and
idle)

5. Advanced DL and UL Traffic


Operations

5.1. Overall DL data transfer (with and


without HS-SCCH)
5.2. Overall UL data transfer
5.3. CPICH enhancements
5.4. CQI enhancements (CQI Types A
and B)
5.5. HS-DPCCH enhancements
5.6. Types of HS-SCCHs
5.7. Retrieval of a DL packet from HSDSCH
5.8. H-ARQ feedback

6. Deployment, Interworking, and


Beyond Release 9

6.1. Interworking with non-HSPA


6.2. HSPA+ Rel 8 and 9
enhancements
6.2.1. Multicarrier aggregation
6.2.2. MIMO and Dual Cell
6.2.3. Dual Cell HSUPA
6.2.4. UL L2 enhancements
6.2.5. CS speech using HSPA
6.2.6. HSPA VoIP WCDMA/GSM
CS Continuity
6.2.7. Beyond Release 9
v1.0

89

Mastering UMTS Core Networks (R99 to R7)


Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: UMTS302

UMTS (WCDMA), an evolution of GSM and GPRS, created a platform to converge the worlds of speech, data services and the Internet, to create a global
market for mobile multimedia. This course contains an overview of the evolved core networks in different releases of UMTS from Release 4 to Release 7.
Release 4 is considered a stepping stone to an All-IP network with a separation of the MSC into an MSC-server and a media gateway. An overview of UMTS and
its vision for the next generation all-IP multimedia networks known as IP Multimedia Subsystems (IMS) and the various concepts used in IMS architecture,
functions, components and interfaces are covered. Enabling technologies such as SIP, MEGACO and IPv6 and the use of these technologies within the IMS
architecture will be studied. A discussion of Quality of Service (QoS) follows, with a presentation of key protocols and the scenarios associated with QoS.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended for those in design, development, engineering and


product management on UMTS core networks.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Identify the driving forces, requirements and goals of the


UMTS evolved core networks
Describe the building blocks used to construct Release 5
List the functions of the UMTS Release 5, Release 6 and Release 7
architecture
Explain the signaling and transport protocols like SIP, BICC, Megaco
and RTP
Step through end-to-end service establishment flows in the Release
5, Release 6 and Release 7 architectures
Explain the scenarios that illustrate interworking with the PSTN and
legacy wireless networks
Identify various services that are supported in Release 6
Describe how session border controller enables access of a
common IMS network with different access technologies like
cdma2000, WiMAX, etc.
Explain Voice Call Continuity (VCC) which enables an IMS subscriber
on a VoIP call to continue the call into a circuit switched
environment
Describe reduction of latency in Release 7 with a simplified
architecture

Suggested Prerequisites
Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor Led)
90

1. R99 UMTS Architecture


1.1. UMTS network architecture
1.2. UMTS releases and their goals
1.3. UMTS circuit and packet switched
domains

2. R4 Bearer Independent CS Core


Network
2.1. Motivation of Release 4
2.2. Reference architecture
2.3. Signaling and transport

3. R5 IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS)


Architecture
3.1. Motivation for Release 5
3.2. Architecture, components and
functions
3.3. Interfaces and protocols

7. Services Architecture
7.1. Services architecture and role of
application servers
7.2. Subscriber profiles and triggers

8. R6 Enhancements to IMS
8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.

New services
Group management
QoS enhancements
Session border controller

9. R7 One Tunnel Architecture


9.1. Different options
9.2. Interface changes
9.3. Scenarios

10. Voice Call Continuity


10.1. Architecture
10.2. Scenarios

4. IMS Signaling and Transport Protocols


4.1. SIP, SDP and MEGACO
4.2. Use of SIP and MEGACO in UMTS
4.3. RTP and RTCP

5. IMS Scenarios
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

Registration
Call origination and termination
Roaming and handovers
PSTN and UMTS IMS

6. Quality of Service
6.1. QoS techniques (IntServ, DiffServ)
6.2. End-to-end QoS architecture
6.3. QoS allocation scenarios

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.0

Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling


Instructor Led | Duration: 4 Days | Course Number: UMTS303

This course covers all the key aspects of the UMTS (WCDMA) Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN) as deployed by major wireless operators and
provides the details of the UTRAN architecture, protocols, operations and services. The signaling protocols and physical layer functions are introduced through
following the end-to-end messaging of signaling initiation and a voice call. Details of power control and mobility are presented followed by packet data
scenarios that introduce the protocols (e.g., MAC, RLC), transport format sets and the basics of radio resource management. The final chapters include an
overview of RF design and introduction to HSPA. The approach of using end-to-end scenarios shows the application of concepts and the theory behind the
concepts. In addition to review questions for each chapter, many of the in-depth chapters have classroom exercises that examine real world drive test logs.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is primarily intended for a technical audience, including those


in RF engineering, systems engineering, network engineering, product
support, operations, and anyone seeking a more in-depth understanding of
the UMTS RAN.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Identify the role of the UTRAN in delivering UMTS (WCDMA) services
List the components of the UTRAN and their roles and
responsibilities
Describe the roles of control plane protocols (RANAP, RNSAP, NBAP,
and RRC)
Identify Uu and Iu interface messages
Specify the physical layer functions and procedures managed by the
UTRAN
Define the details of system acquisition, initialization and
authentication of the UE
Explain the functions and procedures of logical, transport and
physical channels
Step through various handover scenarios including inter-radio
access technology (UMTS to GSM)
Highlight the procedures that support intra- and inter-UTRAN
mobility
Explain the steps of setting up and maintaining an RRC connection
Explain the evolution of UMTS to HSDPA/HSUPA

Suggested Prerequisites
Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor Led)

1. Introduction

1.1. UMTS architecture


1.2. UMTS Quality of Service (QoS)

2. UMTS Architecture
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

Access and non-access stratums


Core networks
UTRAN
RANAP

3. WCDMA in UMTS
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

Comparison of technologies
Spread Spectrum techniques
Channelization and scrambling codes
Power control
Handover and reselection

4. WCDMA Channels Overview


4.1. Air interface channel structure
4.2. Modulation

5. Network Perspective
5.1. Minimum set of channels
5.2. System acquisition
5.3. Random access

6. RRC Setup
6.1. RRC setup procedure
6.2. E911 redirect

7. Voice Call Setup


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.

Paging
Authentication and security
Transport channel combinations
DPDCH/DPCCH structure

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

8. WCDMA Power Control


8.1. Key RF terms
8.2. Power control

9. Mobility - Intra-Frequency
9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.

Mobility while Idle


Mobility while connected
Soft and softer handover
SRNS relocation

10. Data Session Setup


10.1. UMTS attach
10.2. RLC protocol
10.3. MAC protocol
10.4. Data call setup
10.5. PDCP protocol
10.6. GTP protocol

11. Mobility - Inter-Frequency and


Inter-RAT
11.1. Compressed mode
11.2. Handovers: Inter-frequency
11.3. Handovers: UMTS to GSM
11.4. Packet-switched Inter-RAT
handovers

12. RF Design, Analysis and


Optimization
12.1. UL and DL capacity for the link
budget

13. HSPA Essentials


13.1. HSDPA
13.2. HSUPA
v1.1

91

Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling


Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: UMTS304

High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) enhances the packet data services provided in UMTS (WCDMA) by increasing the data throughput and reducing delays. The
HSPA network offers UMTS subscribers much higher data rates, in both the uplink and downlink. HSPA has three key technology enhancements: link adaptation
using adaptive coding and modulation, incremental redundancy and fast scheduling. This course describes the key benefits and challenges of the HSPA
technology and the enhancements to the signaling protocols to support HSPA. The focus is primarily on the radio network with emphasis is placed on the new
channels and related operations. The overall operations of HSPA, starting from measurements and ending with HARQ, are addressed in detail. The key concepts
in the course are tied together with several scenarios that offer insight into the reconfiguration of the radio link and mobility.

Intended Audience

This course is primarily intended for a technical audience, including those


in RF engineering, systems engineering, network engineering, product
support, operations, and anyone seeking a more in depth understanding of
the HSPA.

Learning Objectives

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


List the driving forces behind HSPA
Describe the key technological enhancements
Sketch the network architecture, related protocols and messaging
architectures of HSDPA/HSUPA networks
Explain how incremental redundancy will be used to improve the
retransmissions mechanisms in both the downlink and the uplink
Describe how the fast scheduling functions will reduce the delays
associated with sending packet data to the end users
Step through the establishment of a packet data session and
reconfiguration of the radio link
Identify the signaling enhancements required to set up an HSPAbased data call
Describe the detailed operations of HSDPA such as CQI
determination, DL scheduling and HARQ operation
Describe the detailed operations of HSUPA such as grant
assignments, E-TFC selection and HARQ operation
Step through various handover scenarios including inter-radio
access technology (HSDPA/HSUPA to R99 to GPRS)
Sketch the message flow of a multi-service scenario

Suggested Prerequisites

Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led)

92

Course Outline
1. Overview of HSPA (HSDPA + HSUPA)
1.1. HSPA goals
1.2. HSPA approach

2. HSDPA Basics
2.1. HSDPA in the UTRAN
2.2. HSDPA channels
2.3. HSDPA strategies

3. HSDPA Channels
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

High speed channel usage


HS-DPCCH, CQI and H-ARQ
HS-DSCH and HS-SCCH
HSDPA UE categories

4. HSDPA Traffic Operations


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

HSDPA data transmission overview


CQI reporting
Node B DL scheduling
Data transmission and control
H-ARQ UE to Node B

5. HSDPA Data Call Signaling


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

RRC connection
PDP context activation
Radio bearer setup
Handover and sector switching

6. HSUPA Basics
6.1. HSUPA in the UTRAN
6.2. HSUPA channels
6.3. HSUPA strategies

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

7. HSUPA Channels
7.1. Enhanced channel usage
7.2. UL channels (E-DCH and E-DPCCH)
7.3. DL channels (E-AGCH, E-RGCH and
E-HICH)
7.4. HSUPA UE categories

8. HSUPA Traffic Operations


8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.
8.5.
8.6.

HSDPA data transmission overview


Scheduling request
Uplink scheduling at Node B
Grant allocation
Data transmission and control
H-ARQ Node B to UE

9. HSUPA Data Call Signaling


9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.
9.5.

RRC connection
Radio bearer setup
HSUPA parameter assignments
Absolute and relative grants
Handover and sector switching

10. Multi-Services Scenario


10.1. Establish a multi-service
connection
10.2. Release a multi-service connection

11. HSPA Interworking


11.1. HSPA - UMTS handover
11.2. HSPA GPRS/EDGE handover

v2.0

HSPA+ Protocols and Signaling (R7, R8 & R9)


Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: UMTS205

This course provides a fundamental understanding of HSPA+ protocols and signaling features defined in Release 7 up to Release 9. HSPA+ refers to the
enhancements of the basic HSPA operation defined for Release 5 HSDPA and Release 6 HSUPA. HSPA+ focuses on layer one and layer two to improve the
maximum data rate and to minimize the overhead for real-time sensitive services. The course first gives an overview of the main HSPA+ features and changes
to the protocols and architecture. The signaling enhancements to the data session establishment procedures are then covered in detail along with providing
details of session setup as well as mobility related signaling procedures for HSPA+. Focus then moves to key enhancements to support real-time services such
as VoIP and associated QoS. The course concludes with a discussion of the key interworking topics between HSPA+ and 2.5G, other 3G, and 4G networks.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is designed for service provider personnel involved in network


planning, design, deployment, integration and operations.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List key HSPA+ features and the associated benefits


Identify the impact of HSPA+ on the network and the UE
Sketch the protocol reference model and key changes from HSPA
Explain new RRC connection establishment procedures
Identify the impact of HSPA+ on paging and mobility
Explain the impact of MIMO on data transfer
Sketch the data session establishment procedure for a high speed
connection
Show how HSPA+ supports VoIP and associated QoS
Illustrate the basic steps of DL and UL data transfer
List key messages and parameters for HSPA+ operations
Show how HSPA+ interworks with other technologies such as
GSM/GPRS, UMTS/HSPA and LTE

Suggested Prerequisites

Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led)


HSPA+ Overview (R7) (eLearning)

1. HSPA+ Overview

1.1. Evolution of UMTS (R99 to R9)


1.2. HSPA+: Promises and challenges
1.3. Summary of key HSPA+ features and
associated benefits
1.4. Impact of HSPA+ on UE and network
1.4.1. Network upgrades
1.4.2. UE categories and upgrades

2. HSPA Architecture/Protocols

2.1. Physical, MAC, RLC and RRC


2.2. HSPA+ channels

3. Signaling Enhancements for Key


Features

Key messages and parameters for


throughput enhancements
3.1.1. High-Order Modulation (HOM)
3.1.2. MIMO and transmit diversity
3.1.3. Layer 2 RLC/MAC
3.1.4. Dual Cell Signaling
3.1.5. F-DPCH enhancements
3.2. Key messages and parameters for
reduction in latency and power
3.2.1. DTX/DRX
3.2.2. Enhanced CELL_FACH
3.1.

4. Call Setup Signaling

4.1. RRC connection setup


enhancements
4.2. Radio bearer setup enhancements
4.3. HSDPA channel assignments
4.4. HSUPA channel assignments
4.5. HSPA+ configuration

5. Paging Procedures Mobility


Management Signaling

5.1. Mobility management (active and


idle)

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

5.2. Handover and sector switching


5.3. Paging procedures

6. Basic DL and UL Traffic Operations

6.1. Overall DL data transfer (with and


without MIMO)
6.1.1. Without HS-SCCH
6.1.2. With HS-SCCH
6.2. CPICH enhancements
6.3. CQI enhancements (CQI Types A
and B)
6.4. Overall UL data transfer

7. DL Traffic Operations with MIMO


7.1. Overall DL data transfer with
MIMO
7.2. CQI reporting
7.3. Node B scheduler

8. VoIP in HSPA+
8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.

Benefits of VoIP on HSPA+


CS Voice over HSPA
HSPA+ enhancements for VoIP
End-to-end call setup
8.4.1. Configuration for VoIP
8.5. QoS in HSPA+
8.6. Mobility scenarios (PS to CS)

9. Signaling for HSPA+ Interworking


9.1. Carrier sharing vs. Multiple
carriers
9.2. Interworking
9.2.1. 2.5G
9.2.2. HSPA
9.2.3. LTE
9.2.4. Centralized architecture
9.2.5. Direct tunnel architecture

v1.1

93

Multi-Carrier HSPA+ (R8 & R9)


Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day

This course provides a fundamental understanding of HSPA+ features defined in Release 8 and Release 9. Multi-Carrier HSPA+ refers to the enhancements
of the basic HSPA+ operation defined for Release 7 HSDPA and HSUPA. Multi-Carrier HSPA+ focuses on the air interface to further improve spectral efficiency.
The course first gives an overview of the main HSPA+ features and associated benefits. Once the overview is given, details of the features are discussed. First,
the throughput-enhancing features and features that help lower latency and/or UE power consumption are discussed. Then, overall call setup process is
illustrated with a focus on Multi-Carrier HSPA+ configuration. Details of the data transfer in the DL and the UL with a focus on radio signaling is given. Finally
Mobility and deployment scenarios are discussed.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is designed for those involved in the design, deployment,


operation, and optimization of HSPA+ networks. It is suitable for planners
and engineers responsible for network planning, design and deployment,
integration and network operations.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

List main HSPA+ features and the associated benefits in R7


Identify HSPA+ enhancements introduced in R8 and R9
Identify the impact of R8 and R9 HSPA+ on the network and the UE
Describe the details of Multi-Carrier operation and signaling in R8
and R9
Summarize the UE configurations and UE categories with respect to
Multi-carrier operation in HSPA+
Illustrate the basic steps of DL and UL data transfer
Illustrate the measurement and handover procedures in Dual
Carrier cells
List deployment scenarios and the associated challenges

Suggested Prerequisites
Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led)
HSPA+ Overview (R7) (eLearning)
Exploring HSPA+ (Instructor Led)

94

1. HSPA+ Overview
1.1. Evolution of UMTS (R99 to R9)
1.2. HSPA+: Promises and challenges
1.3. Summary of key HSPA+ features and
associated benefits for R7, R8 & R9
1.3.1. Multi-carrier HSPA+
1.3.2. Spectrum aggregation
1.3.3. Multiple antenna techniques
1.3.4. High-Order Modulation in DL
1.3.5. Enhanced serving cell change
1.3.6. Enhanced CELL_FACH
1.3.7. L2 enhancements
1.3.8. Direct tunnel architecture
1.4. Impact of R8 & R9 HSPA+ on UE and
network
1.4.1. Network upgrades
1.4.2. UE categories and upgrades

2. Basic DL and UL Traffic Operations


2.1. Overall UL/ DL data transfer
2.1.1. With and without MIMO
2.1.2. With Dual Carrier
2.1.3. With and without HS-SCCH
2.2. CQI reporting
2.3. Node B scheduler
2.4. HS-SCCH signaling
2.5. Retrieval of a DL packet from HSDSCH
2.6. H-ARQ feedback
2.7. UL data transfer operations

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

3. Call Setup
3.1. Call setup signaling
3.2. HSPA+ configuration
3.3. Signaling for multi-carrier
operations in the UL and DL

4. Mobility Management
4.1. Mobility management (active and
idle) in DC-HSPA
4.2. Measurement control for Dual
Carrier operation
4.3. UE Measurement reporting for Dual
Carrier operation
4.4. Enhanced serving cell change
4.5. Handovers in Dual Carrier
scenarios

5. Deployment, Interworking and


Beyond Release 9
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

Deployment challenges
Carrier sharing vs. multiple carriers
Deployment scenarios
Voice Call Continuity with
WCDMA/GSM
5.5. Interworking with 2.5G, HSPA and
LTE
5.6. HSPA+ Release 10 enhancements
5.7. Performance aspects in Dual
Carrier operations

v1.1

IMS in UMTS (R8) Networks


Instructor Led | Average Duration: 3 Days

UMTS (WCDMA) creates a platform to converge the different worlds of voice and data services to create a global market for mobile multimedia. This course is
intended for those seeking an overview of UMTS vision for the next generation All-IP multimedia networks known as IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). This
course provides an overview of the various concepts used in IMS architecture, functions, components and interfaces. Enabling technologies such as SIP,
MEGACO and IPv6 and the use of these technologies within the IMS architecture will be studied. A discussion of Quality of Service (QoS) follows, with a
presentation of key protocols and the scenarios associated with QoS. Single Radio Voice Call Continuity between IMS and a circuit switched environment will
be studied.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended to provide a technical overview of the IMS. It is


appropriate for all technical personnel as well as those in product
management, technical sales, planning, architecture, design, deployment
and support.

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


List the motivation, benefits and challenges with IMS in UMTS
Sketch IMS network architecture in relation to UMTS
List the functions of the key components in IMS
Explain functions of key protocols such as SIP, Megaco, and RTP
Describe basic IMS operations over a UMTS network
Explain how a UMTS subscriber makes an IMS call
Explain how IMS enables dynamic Quality of Service (QoS) in UMTS
Explain how IMS provides a service delivery platform
Discuss the IMS security architecture
Describe the IMS interconnection strategy
Explain how IMS is being used to provide service continuity between
different access networks
Depict scenarios that illustrate interworking with the PSTN
Sketch the IMS charging architecture

Suggested Prerequisites
IP Convergence Essentials (Instructor Led)
Overview of IMS (eLearning)
Overview of UMTS (eLearning)

1.1. The IP convergence big picture


1.2. Motivation and benefits of IMS in
UMTS

2. UMTS PS Core Network Overview

Learning Objectives

1. Introduction

2.1. Reference architecture


2.2. Operations
2.2.1. Attach to the network
2.2.2. Set up a session

3. SIP Overview
3.1. Reference architecture
3.2. Operations

4. IMS Architecture
4.1. Reference architecture
4.2. Components and functions
4.3. CSCF, HSS, MGCF, MGW, etc.

5. IMS Signaling Protocols


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

IMS core network interfaces


IMS SIP
Diameter
Media protocols H.248, RTP, RTCP

6. IMS Basic Operations - Registration


6.1. Overview
6.2. Discovery and selection of nodes
6.3. Authentication

7. IMS Basic Operations Call Scenario


7.1. Overview
7.2. Media and QoS negotiation
7.3. Interworking with PSTN
2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

8. IMS QoS
8.1. 3GPP policy and charging control
8.2. QoS flow example

9. IMS Services
9.1. IMS application server
architecture
9.2. End to end applications
9.3. Network based applications
9.4. Media server interactions
9.5. Service configuration (XCAP)

10. IMS Security


10.1. Key security challenges
10.2. Signaling and media protection
10.3. NAT/firewall traversal

11. Interconnection
11.1. IBCF
11.2. IPv6/IPv4
11.3. IMS SIP to Non-IMS SIP
11.4. IMS SIP to Non-SIP

12. IMS Mobility


12.1. IMS Centralized Services (ICS)
12.2. IMS Service Continuity (ISC)
12.3. SRVCC

13. Charging
13.1. Charging architecture
13.2. Offline charging
13.3. Online charging

v1.0

95

3GPP Packet Core Networks (R99 to R8)


Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days

The UMTS core network was created to support the increasing demand for wireless voice and data traffic. As data usage increases, there is a growing need for
operators to be able to understand more detail about data usage patterns in their network. This course provides an overview of the 3GPP core network as it has
evolved from UMTS Release 99 through the LTE Evolved Packet Core (Release 8). It explores the 3GPP services architecture (IP Multimedia Subsystem, or IMS) and
the various concepts used in IMS architecture, functions, components and interfaces. The course also covers key topics such as PCC, QoS, and interoperability
between UMTS and LTE as well as implementation of Femto Cells (Home NodeB), and the emerging area of local internet breakout. We take an end to end view of the
network and explain practical implementations of services such as enterprise connectivity, email connectivity, voice using IMS, etc. The course covers various aspects
of mobility management for both UMTS and LTE networks.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended for those in design, development, engineering and


product management on UMTS core networks.

Learning Objectives
After completing this workshop, the student will be able to:

Sketch the 3GPP Core Network architecture for R99-R8


Describe key steps in the 3GPP evolution from 2G through 4G
List key features of the 3GPP packet data releases (R99 through
R8)
Sketch an end-to-end call and data session setup for UMTS/HSPA
Explain various roaming scenarios and the role of GRX & IPX
Sketch how UMTS/LTE use Ethernet backhaul and IP/MPLS
Sketch how popular data services such as email and private IP
access are implemented over UMTS/HSPA networks
Describe UMTS/LTE data mobility in light of 1xEV-DO and WiMAX
Explain the function of key protocols like SIP, BICC, and RTP
Sketch end-to-end IMS-based service call flows for VoIP and SMS
Illustrate how QoS is allocated end-to-end
Illustrate IMS interworking with the PSTN and legacy wireless
Describe the function and application of PCC

Suggested Prerequisites
UMTS Mobility (eLearning)
Overview of IMS (eLearning)
LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (eLearning)

96

1. Setting the Stage


1.1. Industry direction
1.2. IP convergence

2. Wireless Network Evolution


2.1. 3GPP evolution: GSM to LTE
2.2. Mobile services

3. UMTS/HSPA Networks Overview


3.1. UMTS transport network
3.2. UMTS core networks

4. UMTS Packet Data Operations


4.1. Wireless Internet over UMTS

5. Mobility Management in UMTS


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.
5.6.

Mobility management functions


Idle state mobility
Connected state mobility
Soft handover
RNC/core network-based handovers
GPRS roaming exchange

6. Data Services Over Wireless


6.1. Email solutions
6.2. VPN access to enterprise networks

7. 3GPP Femtocells and Local Breakout


7.1. Architectures
7.2. Femto operations
7.3. Local breakout operations

8. Policy Charging and Control (PCC)


8.1. Architectures
8.2. Diameter PCC profile
8.3. Operations

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

9. LTE Evolved Packet Core (EPC)


9.1. Architecture
9.2. EPC network nodes

10. LTE EPC Operations


10.1. Registration
10.2. Default and dedicated bearer
10.3. Mobility
10.3.1. Idle mode and mobility
10.3.2. Intra-MME mobility
10.3.3. Inter-MME mobility
10.4. Interworking
10.4.1. Interworking with 3GPP
10.4.2. Interworking with non3GPP

11. Quality of Service

11.1. QoS in UMTS networks


11.2. End-to-end QoS UMTS IMS
configuration
11.3. QoS enhancements for LTE
networks

12. IMS Architecture


12.1. Session management
components
12.2. Database components
12.3. Interworking components
12.4. Services components

13. IMS Scenarios


13.1. Registration
13.2. VoIP origination
13.3. IMS interworking
13.4. Supporting SMS in LTE
13.5. IMS roaming
v1.0

UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+ Air Interface

Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: UMTS306


The Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) and its extension HSPA+ belong to the third generation family of
3GPP technologies. In UMTS, the air interface was designed to support bidirectional 2 Mbps, Quality of Service (QoS), security and concurrent circuit-switched
and packet-switched services. Riding the wave of successful GSM/GPRS networks, the quest for better user experience was realized in UMTS with the advent
of HSPA and eventually HSPA+. This course provides the details of the Layer 1, 2 and 3 procedures and technology features in UMTS, HSPA and HSPA+, taking
a handset-centric view.

Intended Audience

This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding of the


UMTS, HSPA and HSPA+ air interface. This includes those in a design, test,
systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, or
verification role.

Learning Objectives

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


Describe UMTS, HSPA and HSPA+ technologies and their
performance goals, and the details of strategies used to achieve
these goals
Sketch the complete protocol structure of a User Equipment (UE)
with emphasis on lower layers (L1, L2 and L3)
Explain channel and frame structures in UMTS, HSPA and HSPA+
Describe air interface operations for UMTS, HSPA and HSPA+ such
as channel coding, transport channel processing, modulation and
coding
List the Layer 1, 2 and 3 features such as AMR, power control and
mobile-assisted handovers
Describe the modulation and coding schemes in UMTS, HSPA and
HSPA+
Explain how link adaptation is performed in UMTS, HSPA and HSPA+
Suggested Prerequisites
UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (eLearning)

Complementary Courses
HSDPA (R5) (eLearning)
HSUPA (R6) (eLearning)
HSPA+ Overview (R7) (eLearning)

Course Outline

1. Introduction to UMTS
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.

Motivation for UMTS


UMTS architecture
UTRAN nodes and interfaces
Roadmap to HSPA+ R10

2. UMTS (WCDMA) Air Interface


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

Spread spectrum technique


Channelization and scrambling codes
Spreading and modulation
Soft handover and RAKE receiver
UMTS radio frame structure

3. Channels in UMTS

5. Overview of HSPA
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

HSPA goals
Air interface strategies
Impact of HSPA on radio network
UE categories

6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

Adaptive modulation and coding


Fast scheduling at the Node B
UE measurement and feedback
H-ARQ and incremental
redundancy

6. Key Concepts of HSPA

7. HSPA Channel Enhancements

7.1. HSPA protocol stack


modifications
7.2. HSDPA UL/DL channel details
7.3. HSUPA UL/DL channel details

3.1. Radio protocol stack in UMTS


3.2. Logical, transport and physical
channels concepts
3.3. Transport channel processing (AMR
as an example)
3.4. Channel mapping and multiplexing

8. HSPA Traffic Operations

4.1. Introduction Life of a UE


4.2. Cell synchronization and network
acquisition
4.3. RRC connection and states
4.4. Registration, security and the radio
access bearer concept
4.5. Cell selection and reselection
4.6. UE measurements
4.7. UE power control
4.8. Compressed mode and inter-system
measurements
4.9. Mobility in UMTS (soft/softer/hard
handovers)

9. HSPA+

4. Physical Layer Operations

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

8.1. HSDPA
8.1.1. Channel quality indicator
8.1.2. HS-SCCH operational
details
8.1.3. Hard handovers
8.2. HSUPA
8.2.1. Uplink resource allocation
8.2.2. Absolute and relative grants
8.2.3. Soft handovers
9.1. Impact of HSPA+ on radio
network and protocol stacks
9.2. Key concepts of HSPA+
9.3. Downlink data transmission
9.4. Uplink data transmission
9.5. MIMO in HSPA+
v1.1

97

UMTS/HSPA (WCDMA) RF Design Mentoring


Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days Onsite | Course Number: UMTS401

The goal of this program is to equip RF engineers to perform UMTS RF network design by mentoring them using real world data as they develop the required skills. The
first part of the program covers the radio network planning and design aspects of a UMTS network. It describes the process of mapping the service and market
requirements to RF system parameters and walks through the link budget calculations. The program discusses cell planning aspects, the use of existing infrastructure,
overlay configurations, backhaul capacity planning as well as growth considerations. The second part of the program consists of mentoring sessions to reinforce the
key learning points by allowing the participants to utilize national design guidelines, site and market data, and design tools selected by the local market to perform RF
design tasks and obtain hands-on experience. Like other mentoring programs from Award Solutions, this program uses tools, processes and real data for the service
providers network.

Intended Audience

This course is intended for UMTS RF design engineers and RF performance


engineers who want to learn UMTS RF design.

Learning Objectives

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


Step through the process of wireless network design
List the source of interference and ways to overcome it in typical
radio networks
Discuss the selection of antenna and TTLNA, and antenna sharing
with 2G
Determine the link budget for a UMTS system
Inter-frequency handover impacts and planning
Describe the impact of operating frequency spectrum and
bandwidth, as well as the required guard band
Discuss various scrambling code planning considerations
Discuss neighbor list planning considerations
Design the radio network based on capacity, coverage and quality
requirements
Calculate the capacity for the cell site, RNC, and backhaul needs
and plan for future growth
Compare and evaluate different network design options
Apply selected tools and processes more efficiently
Analyze network economics for different design choices

Suggested Prerequisites

Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led)


Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led)

Special Note
Market-specific tools and configuration data are needed three weeks prior to the class to
deliver maximum value for the attendees.

98

Course Outline

1. Introduction to UMTS System Design


1.1. Process of wireless network design
and deployment
1.2. UMTS network requirements

2. UMTS Air Interface


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

WCDMA
HSPA
IFHO/IRAT
Design KPIs

3. UMTS/HSPA System Planning


Considerations
3.1. Impacts of operating frequency
3.2. Scrambling code planning
3.3. Parameter settings

4. System Planning Exercise


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

Frequency considerations
Parameter planning
Coverage goals
Capacity goals

5. Antenna Considerations
5.1. Antenna selection
5.2. Antenna sharing
5.3. Diversity techniques of UMTS

6. Link Budget for UMTS/HSPA


6.1. System parameter considerations
6.2. Maximum allowable path loss for UL
and DL

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

7. Link Budget Exercise


7.1. Uplink
7.2. Downlink
7.3. Options and balancing

8. UMTS RF Design
8.1. Market, radio and service
requirements
8.2. RF design process and options
8.3. Propagation models
8.4. Site configurations

9. Coverage Design Exercises


9.1. Overlay design
9.2. IFHO/IRAT planning

10. UMTS Network Capacity Planning


10.1. Cell site capacity planning
10.2. Capacity design
10.3. Capacity optimization
10.4. Backhaul capacity planning

11. Capacity Exercises


11.1. Capacity design
11.2. Capacity optimization

12. Cell Planning Considerations


12.1. Site selection tradeoffs
12.2. Site selection process
12.3. Neighbor list planning

13. Site Shakedown and Acceptance


13.1. Site acceptance
13.2. Cluster acceptance

v1.4

UMTS (WCDMA) RF Optimization Mentoring (1 of 2)


Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days (Workshop 1) | Course Number: UMTS402

UMTS allows operators to offer higher data rates and more capacity in their networks. This unique mentoring workshop delves deep into the behavior of UMTS
in real-world environments, providing insights into the symptoms and possible causes of field performance issues. UMTS RF Optimization Mentoring is divided
into two instructor led sessions that include all aspects of UMTS. The first workshop allows participants to gain in-depth knowledge of the subjects of coverage
and containment, neighbor list tuning, access, and dropped calls. This knowledge transfer is obtained by allowing participants to gain hands-on experience
using market specific tools, drive data, counters, and vendor OSS tools. During the coverage and neighbor list tuning section, the students will use marketspecific post processing tools to analyze scanner data and to identify coverage and neighbor issues.

Intended Audience

This in-depth mentoring program is intended for wireless network


operators, particularly RF professionals involved in cell planning and
design, system design, RF engineering, and RF mentoring.

Learning Objectives

After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Utilize multiple RF coverage plots to assess coverage and


containment issues, using market specific tools (e.g. Actix and
MapInfo)
Identify and prioritize coverage issues (i.e. polluting cells) and
suggest corrective actions using market propagation tools
Understand vendor specific neighbor list algorithms
Uncover neighbor list issues using drive test post processing tools,
as well as vendors OSS tools
Explain the random access and call setup procedures and list
vendor specific parameters affecting access performance
Identify and troubleshoot access failures and dropped calls using
market specific post processing tools
Utilize vendor OSS tools (e.g. UE and cell traces, event data, and
reported measurements), as well system counters; to target cells
with potential performance issues and troubleshoot the root cause
of access failures and dropped calls, and suggest corrective actions

Suggested Prerequisites
Vendor training as appropriate
Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led)
Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led)

Workshop 1 Session Outline

1. Introduction to UMTS Optimization


1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.

Optimization overview
KPI Summary
Optimization methodology
Tools available for optimization
Physical layer processing overview
WCDMA measurement overview

2. RF Coverage and Containment


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
2.7.

Defining the right coverage


Key plots for assessing coverage
Pilot pollution analysis
Coverage analysis
Workshop using MapInfo
Workshop using post processing tool
Workshop using propagation tool

3. Neighbor List Tuning


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

WCDMA versus GSM NL strategies


Rules for NL selection
Scanner based NL tuning techniques
Vendor specific algorithms
Workshop using market specified
tool
3.6. Workshop using OSS tools

4. Access Performance
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

Call setup overview


Sources of access failures
Random access procedure
Parameters related to access
Workshop using post processing
tool
4.6. Workshop using OSS tools
4.7. Workshop using counters

5. Dropped Calls and Call Quality


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.
5.6.

Dedicated channel operations


Sources of dropped calls
Soft handover parameters
UL versus DL drops
BLER analysis (UL and DL)
Workshop using post processing
tool
5.7. Workshop using OSS tools
5.8. Workshop using counters

Special Note
Market-specific network, configuration data, as well as statistical reports are needed three weeks
prior to the course to deliver maximum value for the attendees.
2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.9

99

UMTS (WCDMA) RF Optimization Mentoring (2 of 2)


Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days (Workshop 2) | Course Number: UMTS402

UMTS allows operators to provide higher data rates and more capacity in their networks. This unique mentoring workshop delves deep into the behavior of
UMTS in real-world environments, providing insights into the symptoms and possible causes of field performance issues. UMTS RF Optimization Mentoring is
divided into two instructor led sessions, which include all aspects of UMTS. This second workshop allows the participants to gain in-depth knowledge of the
R99 and HSPA packet-switched (PS) data. This knowledge transfer is obtained by allowing participants to gain hands-on experience using market-specific
tools, drive data, counters, and vendor OSS tools. During the R99 and HSPA PS modules, the students will gain a practical understanding of the vendors
algorithms, parameters and counters related to R99 PS channel switching, HSDPA, and HSUPA.

Intended Audience

This in-depth mentoring program is intended for wireless network


operators, particularly RF professionals involved in cell planning and
design, system design, RF engineering, and RF mentoring.

Learning Objectives

After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Describe vendor-specific algorithms related to R99 packet-switched


data (e.g., channel switching, and state changes)
Utilize market-specific tools to plots throughput, and assess
coverage and containment issues affecting packet-switched
performance
Discuss HSDPA and HSUPA technology, and be familiar with vendorspecific implementation
Evaluate network statistics (counters) to assess cell throughput
performance, shared resource utilization, as well as target cells with
potential performance issues
Identify HSDPA and HSUPA performance issues related to RF
coverage using market-specific post processing tools
Corroborate RF issues with a market propagation tool and
recommend corrective action
Utilize vendor OSS tools (e.g., UE and cell traces, event data, and
reported measurements) to troubleshoot the root cause of packetswitched performance issues, and suggest corrective actions

Suggested Prerequisites

Vendor training as appropriate


Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led)
Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led)
UMTS (WCDMA) RF Optimization Mentoring Workshop 1 (Instructor Led)

Special Note

Workshop 2 Session Outline

6. Packet Switched Data Performance


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.

Vendor specific R99 PS parameters


Vendor specific R99 PS algorithms
Throughput efficiency
Performance and capacity tradeoffs
Workshop using counters

7. HSDPA Technology and Performance


7.1. HSDPA overview
7.2. HSDPA performance issues
7.3. Key plots for assessing HSDPA
performance
7.4. Vendor specific parameters and
algorithms related to HSDPA
7.5. Workshop using post processing tool
7.6. Workshop using OSS tools
7.7. Workshop using counters

8. HSUPA Technology and Performance


8.1. HSUPA overview
8.2. HSUPA performance issues
8.3. Key plots for assessing HSUPA
performance
8.4. Vendor specific parameters and
algorithms related to HSUPA
8.5. Workshop using post processing tool
8.6. Workshop using OSS tools
8.7. Workshop using counters

9. Inter Frequency and IRAT


Handover
9.1. Idle/connected IFHO and IRAT
overview
9.2. Vendor specific Parameters and
Algorithms related to IFHO and
IRAT
9.3. 2G and 3G core network issues
9.4. Performance impacts related to
parameters
9.5. Workshop using post processing
tool
9.6. Workshop using OSS tools
9.7. Workshop using counters

10. Radio Capacity Optimization


10.1. Overview of limited resources
10.2. Code vs. Power limited networks
10.3. Capacity versus quality impacts
10.4. Method for determining system
capacity
10.5. Soft Handover Factor analysis
using Vendor Specific counters
10.6. Workshop using vendor specific
reports, counters, and traces

Market-specific network, configuration data, as well as statistical reports are needed three weeks
prior to the course to deliver maximum value for the attendees.

100

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.9

UMTS/HSPA+ RF Optimization Workshop


Instructor Led | Duration: 4 Days (Intense workshop)

UMTS allows operators to provide higher data rates and more capacity in their networks. This customized mentoring workshop for performance engineers delves deep into the
behavior of UMTS and HSPA+ in real-world environments, providing insights into the symptoms and possible causes of field performance issues. This advanced level workshop
assumes that the participants to have in-depth knowledge in UMTS and HSPA+ technology, RF Coverage and Containment, and Neighbor List Tuning, This workshop focuses
on Access issues, Dropped Calls, Soft handover issues, HSPA+ Packet Switched data, Inter Frequency Handover and Inter Radio Access Technology (IRAT) Handovers. This
knowledge transfer is achieved by using actual market specific data and tools. Participants will gain hands on experience in analyzing their own market data using market
specific tools, drive data, counters, and vendor OSS tools and data. The exercises in each of the key areas will allow the participant to gain experience using post processing
tools, as well as counters to identify, troubleshoot, and determine the root cause for specific setup, failure and throughput issues.

Intended Audience

This in-depth mentoring program is intended for wireless network


operators, particularly RF/system performance engineers.

Learning Objectives

Workshop Session Outline

1. HSPA+ Performance Optimization


1.1. Optimization principles
1.2. Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


Identify the different counters that are pegged by vendor products at
different stages in the call flow for circuit and packet switched
services
Use scanner and mobile drive plots to evaluate network coverage
and interference levels
Identify and troubleshoot access failures and dropped calls using
market-specific counters, parameters and tools
Understand the benefits and impacts of HSPA+ features
Describe HSPA+ data session setup and be familiar with the vendorspecific implementations
Evaluate HSPA+ network statistics to assess throughput
performance and resource usage, and to identify potential problems
Describe the algorithms and parameters related to IRAT and IFHO,
and the effects of changing these parameters

2. RF Coverage and Neighbor Lists

Required Prerequisites

4. Dropped Calls and Call Quality

Very good knowledge of UMTS and HSPA+ signaling and technology


Familiar with vendor-specific tools, logs and counters
Able to use and analyze call logs, Excel spreadsheets and MapInfo
files as required for the in-class exercises

Special Note

Market-specific network logs, configuration data, as well as statistical reports are needed
three weeks prior to the course to deliver maximum value for the attendees. Our Subject
Matter Expert (SME) will analyze the market specific data to identify and develop examples
and exercises for each performance area discussed in the workshop.

2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

RF measurements
Coverage optimization
Pilot pollution
RF coverage plots
Neighbor lists and composite
neighbor lists
2.6. In-class exercises

3. Access Performance
3.1. Voice call establishment
3.2. Random access process and
parameters
3.3. Accessibility KPIs
3.4. Access failure scenarios
3.5. In-class exercises
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

UL and DL synch
Retainability KPIs
Dropped call scenarios
In-class exercises

5.4. IFHO and IRAT handovers


5.5. In-class exercises

6. HSPA+ Downlink Performance


6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.
6.6.
6.7.
6.8.

Packet call establishment


Packet data KPIs
RAB and state switching
Downlink operations
Code and power management
CQI
DL throughput optimization
In-class exercises

7. HSPA+ Uplink Performance


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
7.5.

UL interference management
Uplink operations
UL throughput optimization
HSPA+ specific features
In-class exercises

8. UMTS/HSPA+ Technology Review


8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.
8.5.

UTRAN architecture
Bearers and channels
Measurement control
Mobility
Power control

5. IFHO and IRAT Performance


5.1. Idle mode cell reselection
5.2. Compressed mode
5.3. IFHO and IRAT triggers

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.0

101

102

2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

Wireless
Landscape
The wireless industry is continuing to go through a transition. It is important for individuals in the wireless industry and in the wireline industries to
fully understand the fundamentals of wireless networks they are expected to design, deploy and support. Wireless network fundamentals require a
solid foundation in 2G and 3G technologies, IP technologies, and the technologies that are enabling interactions between the wireless and traditional
wireline technologies.

About the Curriculum

Award Solutions has assembled a comprehensive curriculum suitable to


both individuals new to the wireless industry as well as industry veterans
who wish to learn more about wireless networks. The courses take students
through the fundamentals.
Award Solutions Wireless Landscape curriculum offers a suite of courses in
both eLearning and Instructor Led formats.

Self-paced eLearning Courses

Welcome to Wireless Networks


Welcome to GSM/GPRS
1xEV-DO Networks (Rev 0)
1xEV-DO Networks (Rev A)
Overview of 3G Wireless Networks
Overview of WiMAX

Instructor Led Courses

Exploring Wireless Landscape, IP Convergence, and 4G


Exploring Wireless Technologies and Networks
Fundamentals of RF Engineering
Exploring GSM/EGPRS/UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+
GSM Performance Workshop
1x and 1xEV-DO Fundamentals
Wireless and 3G/4G Basics

Overview of 3G Wireless Networks eLearning Course

2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

103

Welcome to Wireless Networks

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: FUND104


Wireless communications have come a long way from early implementations to todays wide offering of available services. This course provides an introductory
overview of mobile wireless communication along with a brief history of the evolution of wireless communications from early systems to todays capabilities.
Fundamentals of mobile wireless networks and their functions are described. A high level description of mobile wireless services and their delivery to the
mobile subscriber is also provided. Participants are not required to be technically oriented to benefit from this course. At the conclusion of this course,
participants will have a familiarity with mobile wireless communications, the fundamental components of the network and their functions, as well as
operations required to deliver basic service.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is for participants who are new to the wireless industry or
desire a general level understanding of wireless communications.
Participants are not required to be technically oriented to benefit from this
course.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Identify characteristics of wireless communications


List advantages of a wireless mobile system
Identify basic wireless network elements
List external networks and services
Identify challenges in providing a mobile radio network
Describe basic wireless service delivery

Complementary Courses

Overview of GPRS (eLearning)


Exploring GSM (Instructor Led)
Exploring GPRS and EDGE (Instructor Led)
Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor Led)

1. Introduction
2. Wireless History

2.1. Characteristics of pre cellular radio


telephony
2.2. Evolution of key cellular radio
concepts
2.3. Characteristics of first generation
wireless (1G)
2.4. Characteristics of second generation
wireless (2G)
2.5. Characteristics of third Generation
wireless (3G)

Put It All Together


Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

3. Wireless Fundamentals
3.1. Advantages of wireless mobile
systems
3.2. Wireless mobile network elements
and connections to external world
3.3. Transport media on a simple level
and role it plays in wireless
3.4. External networks/services to which
mobiles connect
3.5. Challenges and considerations in
providing a mobile radio network
3.6. Aspects of a mobile network carrier

4. Wireless Service Delivery


4.1. Steps involved in a mobile
registration
4.2. Steps involved in a typical voice call
4.3. Steps involved in a typical data call

104

+1.972.664.0727
2013
2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

v3.0

Welcome to GSM/GPRS

eLearning | Average Duration: 1.5 hours | Course Number: GPRS101


Wireless communications have come a long way from early implementations to todays wide offering of available services. This course provides a GSM and
GPRS overview of mobile wireless communications. It presents a brief history of the progression of wireless communications from early systems to todays
capabilities. Mobile wireless networks, their elements and their functions are described. In addition, mobile wireless services and their delivery to the mobile
subscriber are described. This course is intended for individuals who desire a general understanding of mobile wireless communications focused on GSM and
GPRS. Participants are not required to be technically-oriented to benefit from this course. At the conclusion of this course, participants will be familiar with
mobile wireless communications, the networks and their elements, as well as the functions and operations required to deliver voice and data service.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is for participants who are new to the wireless industry or
desire a general level understanding of wireless communications.
Participants are not required to be technically-oriented to benefit from this
course.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the evolution of wireless communication technology from
1G to 3G
List network components and the function of each component at an
overview level
Identify network elements and their functions
Describe wireless service delivery call flows

Suggested Prerequisites
Welcome to Wireless Networks (eLearning)

Complementary Courses

Welcome to UMTS 3G Networks (eLearning)


Exploring GSM (Instructor Led)
Exploring GPRS and EDGE (Instructor Led)
Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor Led)

1. Introduction
2. Overview of Wireless in Todays
Landscape
2.1. Evolution path from 1G to 3G
2.1.1. 1st generation
2.1.2. 2nd generation
2.1.3. 2.5 generation (GPRS/EDGE)
2.1.4. Intro to 3rd generation
2.2. Identify major wireless players

3. Network Overview
3.1. Components of the wireless network
3.1.1. Mobile devices
3.1.2. RAN
3.1.3. Circuit-switched core network
3.1.4. PSTN
3.1.5. IP core network
3.1.6. External packet services,
transport, roaming, OSS

4.3. Signaling system 7 network


4.4. GSM short message service
network components
4.5. CDMA-based 2G voice network
4.6. GPRS IP core network
4.6.1. SGSN
4.6.2. GGSN

5. Wireless Service Delivery


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

Registration
Voice calls
Short message service
Data calls

6. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

4. Network Elements
4.1. Radio Access Network (RAN)
4.1.1. The cellular concept
4.1.2. Electromagnetic spectrum
4.1.3. Cell sites
4.1.4. Base stations and base
station controllers
4.2. Circuit-switched core network
4.2.1. MSC/VLR
4.2.2. HLR/Authentication center

+1.972.664.0727
2013
2013 Award
Award Solutions,
Solutions, Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

v2.0

105

1xEV-DO Networks (Rev 0)

eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: EVDO106


CDMA2000 networks have been deployed in many parts of the world. While these networks provide a higher voice capacity and support for packet data
networks, they do not meet the IMT-2000 requirements for 2 Mbps data rates. 1xEV-DO Rev 0 represents the next step in the evolution of CDMA2000
systems, supporting data rates in excess of 2 Mbps and non-real-time packet data services. This course introduces 1xEV-DO technology. Specifically, air
interface aspects are explained to show how 1xEV-DO Rev 0 can achieve a 2 Mbps bandwidth. In addition, the 1xEV-DO network architecture is covered. Since
1xEV-DO is deployed as an overlay to CDMA2000 networks, most service providers will want to know how 1xEV-DO systems will interoperate with CDMA2000
networks. This course addresses those questions, and concludes with a discussion of air interface protocols, channel structure and network interfaces.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding of the


evolution of the CDMA2000 network to 1xEV-DO Rev 0. This includes
those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network
engineering, or verification role.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Discuss the relationship between 1xEV-DO and CDMA2000
Define important features of 1xEV-DO such as air interface, peak
data rates and average data rates
Discuss how 1xEV-DO Rev 0 is able to achieve higher data rates
Explain the 1xEV-DO Rev 0 air interface details including the
protocol layering
Highlight the forward and reverse link features in 1xEV-DO Rev 0
List requirements for handsets and networks to achieve
interoperability with CDMA2000
Describe interoperability configurations
Examine how user originated session

1. 1xEV-DO Introduction
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.

Introduction to 1xEV-DO
Motivation for 1xEV-DO
1xEV-DO standards
1xEV-DO data rates in forward and
reverse directions
1.5. How are higher data rates achieved
in 1xEV-DV?

2. 1xEV-DO Architecture

2.1. Overview of the 1xEV-DO architecture


2.2. New 1xEV-DO components and
interfaces

7. Call Flows

7.1. Mobile data session origination


using simple IP

8. Summary
Put It All Together

Assess the knowledge of the participant


based on the objectives of the course

3. 1xEV-DO Air Interface

3.1. 1xEV-DO air interface functions and


capabilities
3.2. Rational for data rate increases in
1xEV-DO

4. 1xEV-DO Forward Link Details

4.1. 1xEV-DO forward link channel


structure
4.2. Important forward link features

5. 1xEV-DO Reverse Link Details

5.1. 1xEV-DO reverse link channel


structure
5.2. Important reverse link features

6. Interoperability with CDMA2000


6.1. Handset requirements for
CDMA2000 interoperability
6.2. Network requirements for
CDMA2000 interoperability

106

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v3.0

1xEV-DO Networks (Rev A)

eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: EVDO107


Wireless service providers in many parts of the world are deploying networks based on 1xEV-DO (Rev 0) to support high speed packet data services. On the
forward link, Rev 0 provides speeds rivaling DSL or cable modem Internet access. In the reverse direction, however, the speeds are much slower, comparable
to CDMA2000 1x. Rev A of 1xEV-DO significantly enhances the reverse link to support data rates over ten times faster than Rev 0. In addition to improving
the reverse link data rates, Rev A seeks to better support real-time services like Voice over IP (VoIP) and streaming video. With Awards celebrated approach to
crystallizing difficult concepts, this course clearly explains key differences between Rev 0 and Rev A for those already familiar with Rev 0.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for those with knowledge of 1xEV-DO Rev 0 who
are seeking an understanding of the Rev A changes and enhancements.
This includes those in design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering,
network engineering, RF deployment engineering, field engineering and
operations roles.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the limitations and issues in 1xEV-DO (Rev 0)
Define important features of 1xEV-DO (Rev A) including peak data
rates, new channels and multi-user packets
Discuss the changes to Data Rate Control (DRC) processing at the
mobile and the base station
Describe how Rev A supports real time services with enhancements
such as small packet size support and multi-user packets
Analyze the performance enhancement changes in Rev A such as
DRC Offset and Data Source Control (DSC)
Describe the reverse link load management approach using Trafficto-Pilot (T2P) power ratios
Illustrate the reverse link data rate enhancements to support 1.85
Mbps
Explain enhancements to interoperability between 1x & 1xEV-DO
networks
Walk though an end-to-end call flow

Suggested Prerequisites
1xEV-DO Networks (Rev 0) (eLearning)

1. 1xEV-DO (Rev 0) Review


1.1. Architecture
1.2. Forward link operations
1.3. Reverse link operations

2. Rev A Changes and Enhancements


2.1. Motivation
2.2. Rev A new features
2.3. Rev A forward and reverse link
channels

7. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

3. Rev A Forward Link Operations


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.

Rev 0 limitations
Data Rate Control (DRC) changes
Multi-user packet support
Additional MAC index values
DRC and Multi-user packets
Performance functions: DRC lock,
DRC offset and data source control

4. Rev A Reverse Link Details


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.

Rev 0 limitations
Reverse link subtypes
Data rate selection
Auxiliary pilot usage
Hybrid ARQ on reverse link

5. Interoperability
5.1. Circuit notification for 1x
interoperability

6. End-to-End Call Flow


6.1. Example end-to-end call flow
2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v2.0

107

Overview of 3G Wireless Networks

eLearning | Average Duration: 1.5 hours | Course Number: FUND105


3G is a set of requirements that describe a generation of wireless technologies. They are based on bandwidth, architecture and Quality of Service. Since this is
a set of requirements, there is not a single standard for 3G. This course provides a description of the 3G requirements as well as an overview of each of the 3rd
Generation wireless technologies. We start with a review of 2G networks (GSM and IS-95) and explore the limitations of those networks and the motivations
for enhancing the network to support 3G requirements. The course continues with the 1x/ 1xEV-D network including the network architecture, key
components, and data rates. Before moving to UMTS networks, the course covers the 2.5G system GPRS/EDGE as this was an important step in the evolution
of GSM networks. The course includes overview of the UMTS network architecture, data rates and ability for UMTS to deliver packet data.

Intended Audience

Knowledge Knuggets

This course is intended for anyone seeking an understanding of 3G


wireless networks, their features and capabilities.

1. Evolution of Wireless

Learning Objectives

2. 2G Wireless Networks

Describe the evolution of 2G voice networks in order to provide high


speed, cost-effective access to the Internet and corporate intranets
State the limitations of 2G networks and motivations behind 3G
List the major 2.5G and 3G technologies of 1x/ 1xEV-DO,
GPRS/EDGE and UMTS
Sketch the 2G and 3G network architectures
Identify the possible evolution paths from 2G to 3G solutions
Compare and contrast the 2G, 2.5G and 3G networks

1.1. Key services found in 1G, 2G and 3G


1.2. Capabilities and limitations
2.1. Architectural overview of 2G
networks
2.2. Overview of data services
2.3. Limitations of 2G systems

3. Evolution to 3G
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Driving forces behind 3G


3G network architecture
CDMA2000 evolution
UMTS evolution

7. UMTS Network Architecture


7.1. Overview of the architecture of
UMTS
7.2. Delivery of traffic in UMTS
7.3. Influence of GSM/GPRS on the
UMTS architecture

8. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

4. 1x/1xEV-DO Network Architecture


4.1. Comparison of 2G to 3G
4.2. Components used in voice calls
4.3. Connection path for data sessions

5. Introduction to 1xEV-DO Release 0


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

Goals and requirements


Ability to provide Internet services
Data rates
Comparison of 1x and 1xEV-DO

6. GPRS/EDGE Network Architecture


6.1. Overview of the architecture of
GPRS/EDGE
6.2. GPRS traffic delivery
6.3. Mobility in GPRS

108

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v4.0

Overview of WiMAX

eLearning | Average Duration: 3 Hours | Course Number: WMAX102


WiMAX is one of the choices for next generation broadband wireless networks. Its high data rates enable advanced multimedia applications. Also, it offers a
wireless alternative to popular DSL and cable modem access services. This eLearning course offers a quick and concise overview of WiMAX networks and the
802.16e based air interface. WiMAX protocols, air interface and mobility aspects are covered to provide an end-to-end view of the network. The discussion of
QoS, security and services enables the student to understand the potential of WiMAX networks. End-to-end connection setup and bandwidth allocation
scenarios provide a glimpse into the operation of WiMAX networks. By the conclusion of this course, the student will understand what WiMAX offers, its
network architecture, how it works, and potential applications and services.

Knowledge Knuggets

Intended Audience
This course is an end-to-end overview of WiMAX networks, so it is targeted
for a broad audience. This includes those in design, test, sales, marketing,
system engineering and deployment groups.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the state of wireless networks and trends for next
generation wireless networks
Sketch the WiMAX network architecture and its interfaces
Describe OFDM concept and how it is used in 802.16e
Define the key features of the 802.16e air interface for WiMAX
List the steps followed to establish a WiMAX connection
Explain how mobility is enabled in WiMAX networks
List the wide range of applications supported by WiMAX networks
Describe the levels of QoS defined in WiMAX to support different
applications
Identify the security issues in WiMAX and describe how they are
addressed
Explain deployment scenarios of WiMAX networks

1. Setting the Stage


1.1. Wireless networks: 3G, WiFi and
BWA
1.2. Trends for next generation wireless
networks
1.3. Standard organizations
1.4. Drivers for WiMAX

2. WiMAX Networks
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.

WiMAX network architecture


WiMAX network interfaces
Key features of WiMAX
Releases of 802.16 air interface

7. Deployment Scenarios
7.1. Deployment choices
7.2. Spectrum issues

8. Summary
Put It All Together
Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

3. WiMAX (802.16e) Air Interface


3.1. OFDM/OFDMA and SOFDMA
concepts
3.2. Protocol stack
3.3. Data rates and coverage
3.4. Mobility profiles

4. WiMAX QoS and Security


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

Applications
Deployment scenarios
QoS classes
PKMv2 security

5. End-to-End Connection Setup


5.1. Network entry
5.2. Walk through of connection setup

6. WiMAX Mobility
6.1. Radio mobility
6.2. Network mobility

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v3.0

109

Exploring Wireless Landscape, IP Convergence, and 4G


Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days

A good understanding of wireless networks and IP-wireless convergence are essential building blocks for new entrants to the communication industry. This
course provides very good conceptual understanding of architecture, leading technologies and operations of 2G/3G/4G wireless and converged IP networks.
The course demystifies the terminology and acronymns commonly used in the wireless industry and helps us understand the dependencies and interactions
with other parts of the network. The course begins with a Big Picture of communications network. It then focuses on wireless technologies such as
GSM/GPRS/UMTS/HSPA+, 1x/1xEV-DO, LTE and explains their operations and supported services. Participants will learn life of a mobile in a typical wireless
network and the roles of various wireless network components and operations of services like SMS, MMS, Web browsing, VPN, email and others.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

The course is for participants with little or no wireless knowledge. The


diverse nature of this course makes it suitable for beginners in various
organizations, including those in project management, sales, marketing,
finance, system design, system test, systems and network engineering,
product planning, management, support and operations.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:

110

Sketch the wireless technology landscape from 1G to 4G


Sketch the IP Convergence architecture
Sketch the wireless network architecture
Describe key features and benefits of CDMA (1x) and 1xEV-DO (Rev
0 and Rev A)
Describe key features and benefits of GSM/GPRS/UMTS/HSPA
Explain how mobility works in Wireless networks
Sketch the technology path for leading carriers in the world
Explain the wireless network operations, including registration, call
setup, call delivery and handovers
Understand the Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) valuable to
wireless service providers
Sketch the VoIP and IMS architectures
Show an end-to-end VoIP/IMS call scenario
Identify the need and driving forces for 3.5G and 4G
Discuss key building blocks of 4G technologies
List the key characteristics of HSPA+, LTE and WiMAX
Differentiate between CDMA, GSM, WCDMA and OFDMA
Explain the various Fixed Mobile Convergence (FMC) options

1. Prologue: Wireless and IPC Landscape


1.1. Shift in business from 1G to 4G
1.2. Shift in Technology from 1G to 4G
1.2.1. Which carrier is doing what?
1.2.2. Which vendor is doing what?
1.3. Network of networks
1.4. IP convergence and FMC
1.4.1. Motivation
1.4.2. Carrier and enterprise

2. GSM/GPRS/EDGE/UMTS/HSPA
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.

Network architecture
Technology overview
Capabilities, benefits and challenges
Identities in GSM/GPRS and UMTS
SIM card and its benefits
Life of a mobile: Operations
2.6.1. Registration/location update
2.6.2. Call Setup, Paging, Mobility

3. CDMA - 1x and 1xEV-DO Rev 0/Rev A


3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

Technology concepts
1x and 1xEV-DO network architecture
Capabilities, benefits and challenges
Life of a mobile in 1x and 1xEV-DO
Mobile IP and roaming

4. Services in 3G networks
4.1. Regulatory E911, CALEA, etc.
4.2. SMS/EMS/MMS, etc.

2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727


+1.972.664.0727

4.3. PTT
4.4. Enterprise Services - VPN, email

5. WiFi Essentials
5.1. Evolution for 820.11 family
5.2. Capabilities, benefits and
challenges

6. VoIP and IMS


6.1. The service network competitors
6.1.1. IMS/MMD
6.1.2. P2P (Skype, MS LCS, etc.)
6.2. Supporting technologies/
protocols
6.2.1. SIP/H.323/Megaco/
H.248
6.3. End-to-end call/session setup

7. LTE and 4G Networks


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.

7.5.
7.6.
7.7.
7.8.

LTE Network architecture


LTE Technology overview
Identities in LTE
Life of a UE: Operations
7.4.1. Registration/location
update
7.4.2. Call Setup, Paging,
Mobility
WiMAX
HSPA+
MIMO What and why?
Deployment timelines and
challenges
v1.0

Exploring Wireless Technologies and Networks


Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days | Course Number: FUND203

A good understanding of wireless networks and IP convergence concepts is an essential building block for those in the wireless communication industry. This
course provides a very good conceptual understanding of the architecture, leading technologies and operations of 2G/3G/4G wireless and converged IP
networks. The course demystifies the terminology and acronyms commonly used in the wireless industry and helps new hires understand the dependencies
and interactions with other parts of the network. The course begins with a Big Picture of communications networks and then focuses on 2G/3G wireless
technologies, services and operations. Participants will learn functions of components like HLR, MSC/VLR, BSC/RNC, BTS/Node B, PDSN/FA, Home Agent,
AAA, BSSM/OMC and operations of services like SMS, MMS, CAMEL/WIN, VPN, email and others.

Intended Audience

The course is for participants with little or no wireless knowledge. The


diverse nature of this course makes it suitable for beginners in various
organizations, including those in procurement, IT, project management,
sales, marketing, finance, system design, system test, systems and
network engineering, product planning, management, support and
operations.

Learning Objectives

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


List and classify various wireless technologies
Sketch the wireless technology landscape from 1G to 4G
Sketch the wireless network and IP convergence architecture
Describe key features, benefits and evolution path for:
CDMA (1x) and 1xEV-DO (Rev 0 & Rev A)
GSM/GPRS/EDGE UMTS/HSPA
HSPA+, LTE and WiMAX
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth
Differentiate between CDMA, GSM, WCDMA and OFDMA
Compare mobility protocols GSM-MAP, GTP, and Mobile IP
Sketch the technology path for leading carriers in the world
Explain the wireless network operations including registration/
location update, network acquisition, voice and data call setup,
handovers and roaming
Sketch the VoIP and IMS architecture
Show end-to-end email, VPN and other data call scenarios
Explain indoor and seamless solutions GAN/UMA and Femto
Identify the need and driving forces for 3.5G and 4G
Explain key building blocks of 4G technologies
List and classify different mobile broadcast technologies

Suggested Prerequisites

Course Outline

1. Wireless and IP Convergence


Landscape
1.1. Wireless technologies
1.2. IP convergence

2. Radio Network Basics


2.1. Modulation
2.2. Propagation issues
2.3. FDMA

3. GSM-EGPRS Networks-Architecture
and Key Services
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.

GSM Architecture and key services


The SIM card
Mobility
Call setup
GPRS and EDGE architecture and
data communication

4. GSM, GPRS and EDGE Technology and


Features
4.1. Air interface fundamentals
4.2. Frequency hopping and power
control
4.3. Modulation and coding
4.4. Idle mode
4.5. Paging/DRX
4.6. Access
4.7. Voice and DTX
4.8. Handover

5. UMTS R99

A general understanding of telecommunications and Internet


Protocol (IP) is recommended but not essential

5.1. WCDMA
5.2. Channelization and scrambling codes

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

5.3. Power control


5.4. Mobility and handover
5.5. UTRAN

6. 3.HSPA and IMS


6.1. HSDPA
6.2. HSUPA
6.3. UMTS IMS architecture

7. CDMA2000 1x
7.1. 1x voice call setup
7.2. 1x data call setup
7.3. 1x mobility and power control

8. 1xEV-DO
8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.

System architecture
FL/RL
Data call setup
Mobility

9. 3.5G and 4G Technologies and


Networks
9.1. LTE, WiMAX, seamless mobility

10. Wi-Fi and Bluetooth Essentials


10.1. UMA, bluetooth, zigbee

11. Voice and Data Services in 3G


Networks
11.1. Consumer voice and data
services
11.2. WIN/CAMEL
11.3. WAP
11.4. Enterprise solutions
11.5. Email solutions
11.6. Streaming media
11.7. Push-to-talk
v1.3

111

Fundamentals of RF Engineering

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: FUND204


A strong understanding of RF engineering fundamentals is required to optimize the performance of cellular networks. This course presents the fundamentals
of RF engineering for new engineers who need to be grounded in the fundamentals and existing engineers who need to fill in any gaps they may have in their
understanding. This course illustrates the network architecture and highlights the importance of several aspects of RF engineering. The RF propagation
mechanisms that affect the RF signal path from the transmitter to the receiver are discussed. Coverage is discussed using the link budget examples for 2G
and 3G systems. Traffic engineering is described from the perspective of Erlang-B and backhaul provisioning. Deployments of GSM and CDMA/WCDMA/EV-DO
networks are considered. Finally, tools useful for network planning/design, deployment, and optimization are reviewed.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This fundamentals course is intended for new or experienced RF engineers


who need familiarity with the fundamentals of RF engineering.

1. Overview of GSM/GPRS/UMTS

Learning Objectives

2. Introduction to Cellular RF Engineering

After completing this course, the student will be able to:

Sketch the network architecture for 2G, 2.5G, and 3G


Outline KPIs that quantify RF performance
Discuss the roles of various RF components
Describe RF propagation mechanisms
Explain various components of the link budget
Summarize how Erlang-B can be used for capacity provisioning
Discuss the influence of vocoders and high-speed data on traffic
engineering
Contrast TDMA deployment with CDMA deployment
Describe issues with equipment sharing between 2G/2.5G and 3G
Explain how tools can be used during various stages of the cellular
network (e.g., design, deployment, and optimization)

1.1. GSM, GPRS, UMTS architecture


1.2. Evolution from GSM/GPRS to UMTS
2.1. Stages of technology deployment
2.2. Planning, design, engineering,
optimization
2.3. Radio and core, backhaul, network
economics- CapEx/OpEx, KPIs
2.4. Importance of RF engineering

3. Review of RF Components
3.1. Baseband and RF processing
3.2. Antennas (basic principles, omni and
sectorized)
3.3. Feeders, jumpers, duplexer and
diplexer
3.4. HPA, LNA, TMA, repeaters

4. RF Propagation Fundamentals
4.1. RF Terms (RSSI, SIR, dB, dBm)
4.2. Distance-based path loss, long-term
fading, and short-term fading
4.3. Propagation models (e.g., HataOkumara and COST-231)
4.4. Spectrum for network deployment

5. WCDMA and HSPA Fundamentals


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

112

UTRAN architecture
PHY layer functions
Handover
HSPA

+1.972.664.0727
2013
2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

6. Coverage and Link Budget


Fundamentals
6.1. Significance of link budget
6.2. 2G/ 2.5G and 3G link budget
(components of the link budget
with numerical examples)
6.3. Influence of carrier frequency
6.4. Challenges of an overlay network

7. Capacity and Traffic Engineering


7.1. Voice calls and Erlang-B model
(trunking and GoS)
7.2. Influence of AMR and high-speed
data
7.3. Backhaul provisioning
7.4. RF technology factors impacting
capacity

8. Deployment Considerations
8.1. GSM vs. WCDMA
8.2. 2G/2.5G and 3G-specific
features for enhanced RF
performance (e.g., handover and
power control)
8.3. Cell-site planning/sharing

9. Tools for Deployment and


Optimization
9.1. Network planning/design tools
9.2. Troubleshooting/KPI monitoring
tools
9.3. Drive-testing and post-processing
9.4. RF optimization approaches

v1.1

Exploring GSM/EGPRS/UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+
Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days | Course Number: FUND201

3GPP-based technologies have left their mark as the most dominant wireless systems deployed globally. The success of GSM technologies in turn has given
rise to optimistic scenarios for the evolution of 3G and 4G technologies such as UMTS and LTE. This course is an in-depth look at the 3GPP family of
standards, from GSM to HSPA+. We begin our journey by gaining an understanding about the underlying GSM technology, which was designed for easy
roaming. We then cover the most important enhancement to 2G-GSM, specifically GPRS and EDGE, which facilitate efficient access to packet data networks.
3G UMTS brings not only higher data rates but also QoS, better security, multimedia and the possibility of fallback on 2G. The efficiency of UMTS is
dramatically improved with the advent of HSPA, and we will take a detailed look at how this is achieved in current deployments.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This course is intended for those seeking thorough conceptual knowledge


of 3GPP from GSM to Release 7 of UMTS. The diverse nature of this
course makes it suitable for beginners in various organizations, including
those in procurement, IT, project management, sales, marketing, finance,
system design, system test, systems and network engineering, product
planning, management, support and operations.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Differentiate among different 3GPP wireless technologies and
describe the driving forces behind each
Sketch different networks and interfaces in 3GPP
Describe TDMA (GSM) and WCDMA radio technologies
Explain the motivation behind HSPA, HSPA+ and LTE
Compare and contrast different technologies
Explain details of air interface operations for each technology
Sketch the following call operations for each technology
Explain mobile and network operations including
registration/location update, network acquisition, voice and data
call setup, handovers and roaming for each technology
Describe interworking between different releases
Discuss how mobility is handled in each radio network
Sketch VoIP and IMS architecture and call scenarios
Show end-to-end email, VPN and other data call scenarios

Suggested Prerequisites
A general understanding of wireless technologies is recommended
but not essential

1. Introduction to 3PP Technologies


2. GSM to EDGE
2.1. GSM
2.2. GPRS
2.3. EDGE

3. GSM Network Architecture


3.1. GSM BSS architecture
3.2. GSM NSS architecture

4. GSM Mobility and Call Processing


4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

IMSI attach and detach


Location update
Handover
Security in GSM

5. Introduction to UMTS
6. UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access
Network (UTRAN)
6.1. UTRAN functions
6.2. UTRAN components
6.3. UTRAN interfaces

7. UTRAN Channels and Protocols


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
7.5.
7.6.

WCDMA terms and concepts


Channelization and scrambling codes
Power control
Handover and reselection
Channel types and channel structure
RRC and the radio access bearer

8. Bearer Independent Circuit Switched


Core Network

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

9. Packet Switched Core Network


Architecture
9.1. Packet-switched protocols
9.2. Service activation
9.3. Access point names

10. Inter-System Procedures


10.1. Cell reselection: UMTS to GSM
10.2. Circuit-switched Inter-RAT
handovers
10.3. Packet-switched Inter-RAT
handovers

11. UMTS IMS Architecture


11.1. End-to-end VoIP call setup

12. HSDPA and HSUPA


12.1. HSDPA
12.2. HSUPA

13. Key Concepts of HSPA+


13.1. R5/R6 HSPA review
13.2. HSPA+ key features
13.3. R6 latency issues
13.4. HSPA+ flat architecture

14. HSPA+ Deployment and


Interworking
14.1. Interworking with 3GPP
14.2. Interworking with other systems

15. Quality of Service


16. Wireless Data Applications
17. 4G - LTE

v1.4

113

GSM Performance Workshop

Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: GPRS401


As wireless service providers continue their deployment of GSM networks, one of the key concerns is how to manage and monitor the performance of these
networks. This unique workshop prepares students to use the tools at their disposal to manage the performance of their GSM network. Modern GSM network
equipment offers a wide array of performance features such as RF Frequency Hopping and the Adaptive Multi-Rate (AMR) speech codec. When properly tuned,
these features provide very high quality voice services and high spectral efficiency in GSM networks. To achieve optimal performance, network operators must
know how to collect the right set of performance measurements, interpret those measurements, and adjust network parameters when improvements are
needed. Concepts are reinforced through hands-on exercises that show the impact of these parameter changes.

Intended Audience

This course is intended for a technical audience, primarily those in RF


engineering, RF performance, system performance, RF design or planning
organizations.

Course Outline
1. Optimizing GSM Networks
1.1. Rationale for performance analysis
1.2. Optimization process

2. Review of GSM Principles

Learning Objectives

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


Describe the basic GSM operations and the configurable
parameters that control them
Discuss the effects of the major GSM performance enhancing
features and understand when each feature should be used
Select the key GSM network performance counters to monitor and
understand how to interpret them
Show how GSM control channels and traffic channels should be
dimensioned to ensure service availability
Describe how frequency hopping can be used with fractional loading
to provide very high spectral efficiency
Examine the AMR speech codec and see how it can be applied to
dramatically increase network quality and capacity
Explain the impact of supporting GSM at 850 MHz and 1900 MHz in
the same cell
Analyze the performance features, counters and parameters of your
network equipment

Suggested Prerequisites

Exploring GSM (Instructor Led)

2.1. Introduction to GSM


2.2. GSM network architecture
2.3. GSM channel structure

8. GSM Voice Fundamentals


9. Introduction to AMR
9.1. AMR primer

10. Improving Quality with AMR


11. Improving Capacity with AMR

3. Cell Selection and Idle Mode


3.1. Cell selection
3.2. Idle mode and cell reselection
3.3. Paging procedures

4. Mobility Management and Call Setup


4.1. Requesting and channel
4.2. The SDCCH
4.3. The TCH

5. Dimensioning GSM Channels


6. GSM Frequency Planning
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

BCCH layer planning


Frequency hopping layer planning
Overlay/underlay planning
Automatic frequency planning and
tools

7. Dedicated Mode Performance


7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.

Measurements
Power control
Handover
Discontinuous transmission

Complementary Courses

GPRS and EDGE Performance Workshop (Instructor Led)

114

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.6

1x and 1xEV-DO Fundamentals

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: EVDO201


CDMA2000 (also known as 1x) has been widely deployed, providing both voice and packet data services in a mobile environment. Many operators have also
added 1x Evolution for Data Optimized (1xEV-DO) to their networks, to efficiently support higher data rates of up to 3 Mbps. This course provides an overview
of the key concepts, architectures and operations that enable these wireless technologies, explaining how high quality voice and high speed data are
delivered. The course begins by reviewing the fundamental concepts of Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA), and then moves into a discussion of how CDMA
technology is used to implement the channels in a CDMA2000 network. The course then looks at 1xEV-DO, highlighting the key similarities and differences
with CDMA2000, and demonstrating how data rates can be increased by an order of magnitude or more.

Intended Audience

Course Outline

This is a detailed technical course, primarily intended for a technical


audience, including those in system design, system integration and test,
systems engineering, network engineering, operations, and support.

1. CDMA2000 Network Architecture

Learning Objectives

2. CDMA2000 Technology

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


Sketch the 1x and 1xEV-DO network architectures
Explain the basic principles of CDMA technology
Illustrate the steps involved in setting up voice and data calls in a 1x
network
Describe the process of soft handoff and power control in 1x
Discuss the concepts of 1xEV-DO sessions and connections
Understand the operation of the 1xEV-DO forward and reverse links
Walk through 1xEV-DO sector switching and Mobile IP

1.1. Standards
1.2. Circuit core network
1.3. Packet core network
2.1. Code Division Multiple Access
2.2. Orthogonal codes
2.3. PN codes

3. CDMA2000 Channels
3.1. Overhead channels
3.2. Traffic channels
3.3. Radio configurations

4. CDMA2000 Voice Call Setup


4.1. System access and registration
4.2. Originating and terminating calls

5. CDMA2000 Data Call Setup


5.1. Packet Data Serving Node
5.2. IP mobility

6. CDMA2000 Mobility
6.1. Hard, soft and softer handoff
6.2. Active set management

9. 1xEV-DO Session Establishment


9.1. Session establishment
9.2. Subnets and address
management
9.3. Packet network interworking

10. 1xEV-DO Connections


10.1. Active set management
10.2. Active and dormant states

11. 1xEV-DO Forward Link


11.1. Forward link channels
11.2. Data rate control
11.3. Transmission formats
11.4. Hybrid ARQ

12. 1xEV-DO Reverse Link


12.1. Reverse link channels
12.2. Transition probabilities
12.3. Traffic-to-Pilot (T2P)

13. 1xEV-DO Mobility


13.1. Sector switching
13.2. Data source control
13.3. Mobile IP

7. CDMA2000 Power Control


7.1. Open loop power control
7.2. Closed loop power control

8. 1xEV-DO Network Architecture


8.1. 1xEV-DO network architecture
8.2. Air and network interfaces

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc. www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.3

115

Wireless and 3G/4G Basics


Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day

Wireless systems have come a long way from early systems based on analog technogies to current 3G/4G wireless technologies that use various digital technologies.
This course provides an introduction to wireless networks, including an overview of the key components of the wireless network architecture (i.e., MSC, VLR, HLR, and
BTS) and an overview of various 3rd generation wireless systems such as CDMA2000 and UMTS and 4G systems like LTE. This course compares and contrasts the
various wireless techniques and standards such as CDMA and GSM. In this course, you will learn the steps required to set up and maintain a voice call, paging
operation in cellular networks, roaming scenarios and handovers/handoffs. It also includes a path to 3G/4G networks, and discusses the characteristics of 3G/4G
systems, including methods to achieve higher data rates and offer multimedia services in a mobile wireless environment.

Intended Audience

The course is for participants with little or no wireless knowledge. The


diverse nature of this course makes it suitable for beginners in various
disciplines of the wireless industry, including those in project management,
sales, marketing, finance, system design, system test, systems and
network engineering, product support and operations.

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
Sketch the wireless network architecture and components for
CDMA2000, GPRS/EDGE and UMTS
Enumerate the network operations including registration, call setup,
call delivery and handovers
List the challenges of radio communication
Explain the key differences between CDMA and GSM (TDMA)
Determine the driving forces behind 3G/4G networks
Outline the evolutionary path from 2G to 3G/4G networks
Define the basic 3G/4G characteristics
Illustrate the services possible with 3G/4G
Describe CDMA2000, UMTS and GPRS/EDGE
Describe LTE

Complementary Courses
UMTS Essentials (R99 to R7) (Instructor led)

Course Outline
1. Introduction to Wireless Networks
1.1. Cellular technology evolution
1.2. The wireless big picture

2. Wireless Network Operations


2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
2.7.

Life of a mobile station


2G cellular network architecture
3G cellular network architecture
4G cellular network architecture
Call processing operations
Roaming
Handovers

3. Radio Basics
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.

Spectrum and signals


Cell sites
Access technologies
Generic radio functionality

6.3. HSDPA
6.4. HSUPA

7. HSPA+
7.1. HSPA+ defined
7.2. HSPA+ key features and
associated benefits

8. 1x and EV-DO Networks


8.1. 1xEV-DO

9. LTE
9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.
9.5.

LTE defined
LTE RAN architecture
EPC architecture
LTE packet data operations
Services

4. GSM
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.

GSM defined
The SIM
GSM radio network
GSM core network

5. GPRS and EDGE


5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.

GPRS defined
GPRS architecture
EDGE defined
2.5G/3G data rates

6. UMTS and HSPA


6.1. UMTS/WCDMA
6.2. UMTS packet data operations

116

2013 Award
AwardSolutions,
Solutions,Inc.
Inc.www.awardsolutions.com
www.awardsolutions.com+1.972.664.0727
+1.972.664.0727
2013

v1.0

Course Index

* New Course
(e) eLearning Course

1x and 1xEV-DO Fundamentals.............................115


1xEV-DO Networks (Rev 0) (e)................................106
1xEV-DO Networks (Rev A) (e)................................107

3GPP Packet Core Networks (R99 to R8)................96

Cloud Computing Essentials for Business................. 9


* Compare and Contrast Cellular Technologies........... 7

* Enterprise IP Network Connectivity............................ 6

Ethernet Backhaul Essentials..................................66


Ethernet Backhaul Overview (e)...............................55
Ethernet Backhaul Planning..................................... 74
Ethernet Basics (e)....................................................60
Ethernet Bridging (e).................................................62
Ethernet VLANs (e).................................................... 61
* Exploring Cloud Computing Service Models........... 76
Exploring GSM/EGPRS/UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+........113
Exploring HSPA+ (R7, R8 & R9)...............................89
Exploring IMS (R8)....................................................69
Exploring IPv6............................................................67
Exploring IPv6 for LTE Networks...............................29
Exploring Ethernet Backhaul.................................... 71
* Exploring Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS)............ 77
Exploring IP Routing and Ethernet Bridging............73
Exploring MPLS.........................................................68
* Exploring SIP, VoIP and IP Convergence with IMS...70
* Exploring the Service Oriented Architecture (SOA)...78
Exploring UMTS (WCDMA)........................................88
Exploring Wireless Landscape, IP Convergence, and 4G...110
Exploring Wireless Technologies and Networks....111

Fundamentals of RF Engineering...........................112

GSM Performance Workshop.................................114

HSDPA (R5) (e)..........................................................85


HSPA+ Overview (R7) (e).......................................... 87
HSPA+ Protocols and Signaling (R7, R8 & R9).......94

H (continued)

HSUPA (R6) (e)..........................................................86


IMS in UMTS (R8) Networks.....................................95
Interconnecting IP Networks (e)...............................63
IP Basics (e)...............................................................56
IP Convergence Essentials.......................................65
IP Convergence for Sales and Marketing................12
IP Convergence Overview (e)....................................49
IP Quality of Service (QoS) (e)..................................53
IP Routing (e)............................................................. 57

LTE Air Interface Signaling Overview (e)..................23


LTE and GSM/UMTS Interworking............................34
LTE Essentials........................................................... 27
LTE Overview (e)........................................................ 21
LTE Protocols and Signaling.....................................32
LTE RAN Signaling and Operations Certification......38
LTE RF Planning and Design Certification Workshop.... 37
LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (e)...22
LTE Services for Enterprise Customers....................13
LTE-Advanced Technical Overview...........................36
* LTE-EPC Capacity Planning Certification Workshop...39
LTE-EPC Networks and Signaling ............................35
* LTE RAN Capacity Planning Certification Workshop... 40

QoS in IP Networks (e)..............................................58

*
*
*
*

TCP and Transport Layer Protocols (e).....................59


Technology Trends for Business............................... 14
The M2M Ecosystem................................................ 10
The Mobile Enterprise............................................... 16
The Road to LTE.........................................................26
The World of App Development................................15
The World of Enterprise.............................................. 8
Topics of Interest....................................................... 17

VoLTE and IMS in LTE-EPC Networks.......................30


Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview (e)............52
Voice and Video over IP Protocols and Technologies... 72
VoLTE Overview......................................................... 24

Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling................93


LTE Technology Overview..........................................28
Mastering LTE Air Interface...................................... 31
Mastering TD-LTE Air Interface.................................33
Mastering UMTS Core Networks (R99 to R7).......... 91
Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling.....92
Multiple Antenna Techniques (e).............................43
Multi-Carrier HSPA+ (R8 & R9).................................90

2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

UMTS Mobility (e)......................................................84


UMTS (WCDMA) RF Optimization Mentoring...99-100
UMTS Signaling (e)....................................................83
UMTS/HSPA (WCDMA) RF Design Mentoring..........98
UMTS/HSPA+ RF Optimization Workshop.............101
UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+ Air Interface............................ 97
UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (e)......82
Unified Communications (UC) and IMS for the Enterprise..11

Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (e)...................108


Overview of IMS (e)................................................... 51
Overview of IPv6 for LTE Networks (e).....................25
Overview of MPLS (e)................................................50
Overview of OFDM (e)...............................................42
Overview of UMTS (e)................................................ 81
Overview of WiMAX (e)............................................109

Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) (e)..........................54


SIP and Diameter for IMS/VoLTE.............................75

Welcome to GSM/GPRS (e)....................................105


Welcome to IP Networking (e)..................................48
Welcome to IPv6 (e)..................................................64
Welcome to LTE (e)....................................................20
Welcome to UMTS (e)...............................................80
Welcome to Wireless Networks (e)........................104
Wi-Fi Overview (e)......................................................44
Wi-Fi Technical Overview..........................................45
Wireless and 3G/4G Basics...................................116

117

4G HSPA+ LTE EPC LTE-ADVANCED TD-LTE VoLTE CLOUD COMPUTING M2M UCC IP CONVERGENCE IPv6 MPLS IMS

Visit our sister site at www.LTEuniversity.com,


an online resource to stay up to speed on LTE.

Americas
Richardson, TX USA
Phone:
+1.972.664.0727
Email:
info@awardsolutions.com
Europe, Middle East & Africa
Dublin, Ireland
Phone:
+353 87 6431747
Email:
info.emea@awardsolutions.com
Asia & Pacific
Bangalore, India
Phone:
+91 80 23169107
Email:
info.apac@awardsolutions.com
Please visit our website at www.awardsolutions.com.

2013 Award Solutions, Inc., Edition 1.0


All rights reserved. No part of this catalog shall be reproduced or transmitted
by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without the express written consent from Award Solutions, Inc.

You might also like